Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / Intermediate Capital Group

Intermediate Capital Group

icp · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker icp
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · Intermediate Capital Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
I

n

t

e

r

m

e

d

I

a

t

e

C

a

p

I

t

a

l

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

C

A

n

n

u

A

l

R

e

p

o

R

t

A

n

d

A

C

C

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

4

annual report 
and aCCounts
2014

IntermedIate CapItal Group plC

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
For 25 years, ICG has  
been trusted by investors. 
Trusted to offer the right 
products. Trusted to take 
the right risks. Trusted to 
specialise and stay close  
to our assets. Trusted to 
deliver returns.

in this report

HoW We ARe  
moving foRWARd

Over the page, our Chairman and CEO offer  
their thoughts on 2013/14, and 25 years of ICG.

contents

Chairman’s and Chief Executive’s statement 

02

This year’s Annual Report is different. We’ve taken 
the opportunity offered by the introduction of the 
new ‘strategic report’ regulations to improve structure 
and flow, and to make sure that we are reporting on 
the things that are material to our audience.

The graphic below shows how we have arranged  
this year’s Strategic report.

strategY

performance  
and priorities

BUsiness modeL

marketpLace

Year in review

risks

resoUrces and
reLationships

The first part of our Strategic report focuses on  
our long term objectives, our strategy for meeting 
them, our performance so far, and our underlying 
business model.

strategic report 

Moving forward 

Strategic objectives 

Performance and priorities 

Business model 

Our markets 

Operating review:  
1.  Grow our assets under management 

  Funds overview 

2.  Invest selectively 

3.  Manage portfolios to maximise value 

Financial review 

Managing risk to deliver our strategy 

Macroeconomic risks 

Our appetite for risk 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

Our resources and relationships 

06

07

08

10

14

16 
18

20

21

22

28

30

32

33

36

Our strategy in action 

Case studies   39

governance 

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance 

Audit Committee report 

Risk Committee report 

Directors’ remuneration report 

Directors’ remuneration policy 

Annual report on remuneration 

Directors’ report 

Directors’ responsibilities 

Auditor’s report 

Financial statements 

Consolidated income statement 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of comprehensive income 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of financial position 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of cash flow 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of changes in equity 

Notes to the accounts 

Glossary 

Notes 

Shareholder and Company information 

47

48

50

54

60

62

63

73

81

86

87

93

94

95

96

97

99

132

134

136

01

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
CHAiRmAn’S And 
CHief exeCutive’S 
StAtement

The 25th year of iCg’s existence marks an important 
step in the transformation of the group.

Justin doWley 
Chairman

christophe evain
Chief Executive Officer

The 25th year of ICG’s existence marks an important step in the transformation of the Group. 
From a niche European mezzanine investment firm, we have evolved into a specialist asset 
manager providing mezzanine finance, private debt, leveraged credit and minority equity to 
mid market corporates in Europe, Asia and the US and to real estate in the UK. This has been 
achieved through significant, yet disciplined, investment in people, systems and infrastructure. 
More importantly, this was only made possible by leveraging our enviable investment track 
record based on selective and active portfolio management, as well as an access to capital 
resources that few of our competitors enjoy. 

In many respects, this past year has given us confidence in the success of our strategy.

Wave oF liquidity leads to a record breaking year 

We have had a record fundraising year and realised a record amount of cash for our fund 
investors and balance sheet, aided by the increased availability of capital in the economy. 
As a result we are managing €13.0bn of assets in third party funds and proprietary capital, 
up 0.4% on March 2013.

As historically low levels of interest rates induced investors to search for higher yielding 
assets, we were able to raise €3.8bn of third party money, up 69% compared to our previous 
highest fundraising effort. First time funds and new strategies represent 45% of the total 
raised, spearheaded by Senior Debt Partners, our European direct lending strategy, and our 
first US CLO. Another key measure of success is the ability to close funds at their hard cap 
– the maximum permitted size. Both our ICG Longbow III mezzanine fund at £700m and our 
Senior Debt Partners strategy at €1.7bn, closed at that hard cap level. The Group was also a 
leading issuer of European CLOs during the year, raising €1.3bn from three fundraisings, two 
of which were upsized during the fundraising process. This momentum has continued into 
the new financial year as our US Private Debt Fund had a $450m first close, including $200m 
from ICG.

The strong year of realisations, which follows a period of low realisations, has provided 
further evidence of our ability to generate good cash returns from our portfolio and continue 
to enhance our track record. We have realised over £1.1bn of cash for our balance sheet 
and £2.7bn to our fund investors during the year. This includes through the full, or partial, 
repayment of 12 of the Group’s opening top 20 assets and the corresponding positions in 
our mezzanine funds, achieving an average money multiple on those assets of 2.1x. We have 
retained a minority equity position in many of these assets which we expect to realise in the 
next few years. As many of these investments were made when the balance sheet invested 
more than the third party mezzanine funds in any given deal, the impact of these realisations 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 201413.0
€bn

Assets under management

158.7
£m

has been felt most strongly on the size of our balance sheet portfolio. Whilst the short term 
impact of these successful realisations reduces our volume of assets under management, 
the returns generated further enhance our track record and help to lay the ground for ongoing 
future fundraising success, as evidenced by our momentum in growing third party AUM 
during the year.

The more benign environment in debt markets makes the investment market more 
competitive for our teams and generating attractive opportunities, whilst maintaining our 
historic credit discipline, has become more challenging. During the year we nevertheless 
invested a record £630.8m on behalf of our mezzanine funds, £524.3m on behalf of our 
Senior Debt Partners strategy and £330.0m on behalf of our real estate funds. In addition, ICG 
co-invested £212.4m alongside our mezzanine funds and committed £181.1m of capital to 
our credit and real estate funds. All these funds have been deploying capital at, or ahead of, 
investors’ expectations without compromising our rigorous investment discipline and process. 
This is testament to our teams’ ability to originate local transactions and their propensity to 
offer innovative financing solutions.

A small number of weaker assets within our investment portfolio continue to underperform 
and we took specific provisions against a number of these assets during the year. The level 
of provisions against our weaker assets, borne out of the financial crisis, should gradually 
reduce as we actively manage these remaining weaker investments. Elsewhere the portfolio 
is performing solidly, and the assets we have restructured during the year are showing signs 
of improving performance.

dividends and capital management

We are committed to financial discipline, both in terms of the quality of investment and 
strategic allocation of resources, as well as ensuring that an appropriate capital structure 
is maintained, all targeted to generate strong returns for shareholders. We allocate capital 
to strategies which are expected to create long term value, whilst having consideration to 
maintaining broad access to financing sources and debt markets, and ensuring sufficient 
robustness for the Group to withstand periods of market stress.

We seek to maximise the value of the business by applying balance sheet capital in three main 
ways, namely:

1. Continuing to invest in well established strategies such as European mezzanine and CLOs

2. Investing in strategies that have been established but continue to mature such as Longbow 

Profit before tax

and Senior Debt Partners

3. Providing capital to incubate selective new strategies that expand ICG’s geographical and 

product offering such as the Nomura partnership and US Private Debt funds

The investment of balance sheet capital in a broader range of fund management products 
will create sustainable earning streams as these strategies mature. As this occurs, the Fund 
Management Company will be generating a greater level of reliable earnings which the Board 
strongly believes will translate into strong shareholder returns. This will enable the Group to 
improve its return on equity over the medium term.

We consider it important that the Group maintains a strong balance sheet position with a 
consistent access to the debt markets. Accordingly, considerations such as maintaining a 
strong and stable credit rating and the financial covenants to lenders are factored into the 
Board’s assessment of the Group’s capital structure. 

02 / 03

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportCHAiRmAn’S And  
CHief exeCutive’S StAtement
continued

Our business model 
and 25 year track 
record leave us well 
positioned for growth.

We also understand the value that shareholders place on regular and sustainable dividend 
payments and we remain committed to a dividend policy linked to cash core income. 
In addition to this, we perform an ongoing assessment of the Group’s capital requirements 
with reference to the above factors over a three year horizon and should there be any capital 
surplus to requirements, we will look to return capital to shareholders at the appropriate time.

Following a review of cash core income over a three year period, the Board recommend a 
final dividend of 14.4p per share, making a total of 21.0p per share for the year, up 5% on last 
year. If approved at the Annual General Meeting (AGM), the dividend will be paid on 28 July 
2014 to shareholders on the register on 13 June 2014. The Board has decided to maintain the 
dividend reinvestment plan (DRIP). Whilst the Group currently is investing significant capital 
into the development of the strength and breadth of the Fund Management business, after 
a record year of realisations we believe that there is scope to reduce the capital base at this 
time. We therefore announce our intention to launch a share buyback programme of up to 
£100m which will be conducted via market purchases over the coming 12 months.

our employees

Our people are critical to the business developing as a third party asset manager and 
achieving our strategic priorities. On behalf of the Board, we thank them wholeheartedly 
for the enormous efforts they have made during the last year. Without their commitment 
we would not have been able to raise and invest our funds, manage our assets successfully 
and open up attractive new markets to facilitate the continued growth of our business.

looking ahead

Our strong balance sheet, scalable infrastructure and dedicated global distribution team 
mean we are well positioned to continue to develop as a third party asset manager. 

Our product pipeline is stronger than ever before which is underpinning the momentum in 
our fundraising. In addition to raising money for well established products, like European 
CLOs, during the year ahead we aim to continue to expand our geographical and product 
offering. We are currently in the market with a US private/mezzanine debt fund, an Australian 
senior loans fund and our third Asia Pacific fund. Preparations are also ongoing for a domestic 
Japanese mezzanine fund in partnership with Nomura, an alternative credit product, following 
a recent team hire, and US CLOs. 

We are focused on managing our portfolio, with a particular focus on the small number 
of weaker assets, to maximise value for our investors. The continued availability of debt 
means our investment teams will need to maintain their investment discipline in the 
competitive environment and we will continue to see a steady stream of realisations. 

For the last 25 years we have built upon the vision of our four founders. Whilst we are proud 
of our accomplishments, the achievements of the last year mean that we are confident that 
we are building for another 25 years of success.

Justin doWley 
Chairman 

christophe evain
Chief Executive Officer

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
i

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

contents

strategic report 

Moving forward 

Strategic objectives 

Performance and priorities 

Business model 

Our markets 

Operating review:  
1.  grow our assets under management 

  Funds overview 

2. invest selectively 

3. manage our portfolio to maximise value 

Financial review 

Managing risk to deliver our strategy 

Macroeconomic risks 

Our appetite for risk 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

Our resources and relationships 

06

07

08

10

14

16 
18

20

21

22

28

30

32

33

36

Our strategy in action 

Case studies   39

04 / 05

Strategic  
report

Financial statementsGovernance 
 
moving foRWARd

We are moving away from our traditional role  
as a principal investor and towards a role as a  
manager of third party funds.

progressing icg’s transition 
to an asset manager

ICG continues its transition to being a 
manager of third party funds from being 
a principal investor. 

The decision to develop the Group as a 
third party asset manager recognised the 
opportunity to use the investment skill and 
balance sheet strength of the business to 
generate long term growth. 

The investment skills of ICG as a third 
party asset manager are underpinned by 
three platforms: 

 – The recently recruited dedicated 

marketing and distribution team who 
sell our products into the market and 
develop longstanding and meaningful 
investor relationships

 – The infrastructure teams which are of 
sufficient scale to meet the demands 
of a growing business in an increasingly 
complex regulatory environment

 – The balance sheet which permits 

participation in, and shows Group support 
for, a much greater product range than 
ever before by investing, as appropriate, 
in selective products

Not only does this strategic direction allow 
the Group to deliver long term growth and 
attractive returns, but diversified sources of 
recurring fee income will increase the stability 
of the Group’s performance.

At the heart of the transition to a third party 
asset manager is the realisation of assets 
where ICG acted as a principal investor 
and the redeployment of that capital in the 
broadened product range. Realisations are 
by nature lumpy and the timing is rarely 
within the Group’s control. When the Group 
commits capital to new funds it is drawn 
down as the fund gets invested. This can 
take up to five years depending on the 
product. This variation in timing gives rise 
to inherent challenges in managing the 
Group’s capital. A strong balance sheet 
is a competitive advantage in our market, 
and acts as an enabler to achieving our 
ambitions, allowing the Group to be 
competitive in regulated markets.

transition timescales and progress

Since ICG began its transition to an asset 
manager in 2010 we have successfully 
established an in house distribution 
capability, expanded our product range and 
further developed a scalable infrastructure 
team. In March 2010 the balance sheet 
represented 26% of all assets managed, 
in March 2014 this has reduced to 18% 
and the continued growth of our product 
base will see this percentage fall further.

The Group has three separate but interlinked 
strategic priorities:

 – Grow assets under management

 – Invest selectively

 – Manage portfolios to maximise value 

This section, together with the sections 
set out on pages 2 to 4 comprise the 
Strategic report.

Justin doWley 
Chairman

christophe evain
Chief Executive Officer

We have successfully 
established a 
dedicated distribution 
capability, expanded 
product range  
and scalable 
infrastructure team.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
strategy

performance  
and priorities

BUsiness  
modeL

marketpLace

Year in review

risks

resoUrces and
reLationships

StRAtegiC objeCtiveS

g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

1grOW  

assets UNDer 
MaNageMeNt

3MaNage  

pOrtfOliOs  
tO MaxiMise  
valUe

2iNvest 

selectively

We aim to grow the profits of our fund 
management business by increasing 
aum. We will build on our strong track 
record, in house distribution team and 
balance sheet strength to:

 – Maximise the existing product portfolio

 – Expand our client base and existing 

products geographically 

 – Expand our product range in 

existing geographies

We aim to invest our aum on a selective 
basis to maximise risk adjusted 
returns using:

 – The sector specialisations of our credit teams 

 – Our local network of originators

We aim to manage portfolios to maximise 
our returns, thereby building on our strong 
track record and generating capital to 
invest in new products. We aim to do 
this by:

 – Reviewing each investment’s performance at 

 – A disciplined approach to considering each 

least quarterly

investment opportunity

 – Engaging regularly with management 

and sponsors

 – Proactively working out problems 

where appropriate 

06 / 07

strategic report 
PeRfoRmAnCe  
And PRioRitieS

We have identified a number of 
key performance indicators (KPis),  
which, taken together, measure the  
progress we have made in meeting  
our strategic objectives.

groW our assets under management (aum)

kpi

Total AUM (€m)

Total third party AUM
IC

New AUM

8,239 9,036

8,679

9,900

10,669

2,942

2,743

2,729 3,030

2,311

10

11

12

13

14

€13.0bn

kpi 

Fee rate on new AUM (%)

overvieW
The Group earns fees on assets under 
management – once they are either 
committed or invested, depending on 
the fund.

The growth in assets under management, 
by raising new funds (including jointly 
managed funds) is a lead indicator of 
revenue growth for the business.

revieW oF perFormance
Assets under management have 
remained flat during the year as the 
record fundraising has been offset 
by the realisation of assets in older 
funds. This has particularly impacted 
the size of the Investment Company 
portfolio. Going forward, we expect that 
fundraising will exceed realisations and 
lead to an increase in AUM.

CLOs and liquid strategies (€m)
Direct investment credit fund (€m)
Direct investment mezzanine funds (€m)
Weighted average fee rate on new AUM

1.35% 1.42% 1.39%

3,800

overvieW
We monitor the average weighted fee 
rate to ensure that new AUM is profitable.

Fees reflect the risk/return profile of the 
underlying asset and are typically higher 
for direct investment funds.

1,855

0.8%

1,395

670

10

11

12

13

14

0.8%

revieW oF perFormance
During financial year 2014 our fundraising 
was substantially for specialist credit 
funds and CLOs. These lower fee 
products typically generate a higher 
marginal profit for the Group as the asset 
management platform is more scalable. 
This contrasts to the preceding years 
where mezzanine funds, which attract 
higher fees, dominated fundraising.

manage portFolios to maximise value

kpi

Impairments (£m)

kpi

Return on equity (ROE) (%)

overvieW
Impairments are charged when there 
is a reduction in the value of an interest 
bearing asset. 

Impairments impact the performance 
and returns of a fund. An indicator 
of fund performance is the level 
of impairments incurred in the 
Investment Company portfolio.

revieW oF perFormance
A small number of weaker assets within 
our investment portfolio continue to 
underperform and we took specific 
provisions against a number of these 
assets during the year. 

The level of provisions should reduce 
as we have gradually worked through the 
remaining weaker assets and portfolio 
difficulties borne out of the financial crisis.

161.8

70.9

70.6

95.1*

80.0

10

11

12

13

14

£95.1m

*excluding £17.3m on a restructured 
asset for which a corresponding uplift 
is reported through unrealised gains

Mezzanine and equity
CFM

IC assets

11.5*

10.8

10.2

8.9

7.2

10

11

12

13

14

10.2%

*Adjusted for £45m one off release of 
previously accrued costs in relation to the 
termination of legacy remuneration schemes.

overvieW
Group ROE is a key indicator of our ability 
to maximise returns from our business. 
However, in any given year, our ROE is 
impacted by the timing of realisations 
and impairments, which by their nature 
are irregular.

Over the medium term the Group is 
looking to improve its ROE.

revieW oF perFormance
Our success at realising our assets over 
the year has crystallised value for the 
Group. The cash generated has been 
used to reduce our outstanding debt 
and this, together with the investment 
in growth initiatives, has impacted short 
term ROE.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014perfOrMaNce 
aND priOrities

kpi 

kpi

FMC operating margin (%)

Investment performance (%)

invest selectively

Mezzanine and equity
CFM

IC assets

48.3

43.9

41.3

40.1

35.1

10

11

12

13

14

35.1%

overvieW
The operating margin of the Fund 
Management Company (FMC) is a 
measure of the efficiency and scalability 
of the business.

As the Group has invested substantially 
in its growth, the return on this 
investment is measured through the 
operating margin.

revieW oF perFormance
We have invested in an in house 
distribution team and new product 
initiatives in recent years. This, combined 
with an increase in new funds charging 
fees on an invested capital basis has 
impacted the operating margin. As we 
invest recently raised money, and raise 
new and successive funds, we expect 
operating margins to increase.

73.2

54.7

64.6

61.0

66.7

10

11

12

13

14

66.7%

overvieW
A measure of investing selectively is 
the investment performance of our 
funds. However, as a specialist asset 
manager, reliable comparable data is 
not readily available.

For the funds where we originate 
assets the best indicator of the quality 
of our investment decisions is the 
underlying EBITDA performance of 
our portfolio companies.

revieW oF perFormance
The Group expects at least 60% of 
the portfolio companies in its mezzanine 
direct investment funds to report results 
above the prior year.

The performance in the current 
financial year has been supported by 
the improving economic environment.

kpi

Dividend per share (p)

Impairments

Capital gains

18.0

19.0

17.0

20.0

21.0

10

11

12

13

14

21.0p

overvieW
Our ability to pay dividends and return 
value to shareholders is a measure of 
our ability to generate returns from our 
Investment Company portfolio and 
managing third party funds.

Further details of the economic model 
of the business are provided on page 12.

revieW oF perFormance
The Group has a dividend policy, based 
on cash core income. Over the last 
five years we have generated sufficient 
returns from our business to grow the 
dividend year on year.

priorities For 2015

The Group aims to maintain and build on its third party fundraising 
momentum across a broader range of products than ever before: 

 – Existing strategies – launching the third Asia Pacific fund and 

further CLOs

 – New geographies – US debt, Australian Senior Loans and 

Japanese mezzanine

 – New products – Alternative Credit 

The first time funds will contribute incremental fee streams  
to the Group and increase the operating leverage of the Fund 
Management Company. 

The Group has generated significant capital to deploy on funds raised 
over the last two years, and has ambitious fundraising targets for FY15. 

We aim to deploy the capital raised in line with the required 
investment run rate, subject to finding investment opportunities with 
the appropriate risk/return balance. The Group will maintain its 
disciplined approach to investment in a highly competitive market.

The Group aims to maximise returns in older funds by realising assets 
to crystallise value for the balance sheet and our fund investors. 
The timing remains uncertain as it is rarely in the Group’s control. 

During FY15 we will continue to actively manage our portfolios  
and to proactively work with management and sponsors on working 
out problems. 

08 / 09

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewRISKSReSouRceS andRelatIonShIpSbuSineSS 
modeL

hOW  
We create 
valUe

What We do and Why

We are a specialist asset manager of 
mezzanine finance, private debt, leveraged 
credit and minority equity. We manage 
€13.0bn of assets in third party funds 
and proprietary capital, providing finance 
to private corporates and real estate. 
We manage these assets using our large, 
experienced and specialist investment 
teams operating from our head office in 
London and our strong local network of 
overseas offices.

What we do is not unique, but the breadth 
and depth of our experience make us a 
specialist amongst asset managers, with an 
enviable track record of generating attractive 
returns for our investors.

Our outstanding track record, built up over 
25 years, means that we are trusted by our 
investors to meet their expectations by taking

appropriate, considered risks when 
investing. We seek to balance risk and 
return, using detailed research and credit 
analysis to inform our judgement and 
create well diversified investment portfolios. 
We make full use of the specialist industry 
experience of our credit fund teams and 
the insights, knowledge and relationships 
of our local investment teams to identify 
attractive investments. Once invested, we 
continue to manage actively our portfolio 
to maximise returns.

Our balance sheet, along with our 
experienced, specialist, local investment 
teams, enables us to access and profit from 
opportunities unavailable to many other fund 
managers and financial institutions.

£ $€¥

structure

invest

manage

realise

Our team combines institutional 
clients’ capital and our 
own shareholders’ funds 
across a range of products. 
Each product has a tailored 
investment strategy and specific 
returns expectations which 
are aligned to the risk of the 
investment strategy.

We earn a management fee from 
managing third party money, 
when it is either committed 
or invested. The fee structure 
depends on the product and 
whether the product is in its 
investment or realisation phase.

Our well established and 
highly disciplined investment 
processes, industry sector 
specialisations and knowledge 
of local markets underpin every 
investment decision. 

The Group’s Executive 
Committee oversees the 
investment process, setting 
and monitoring the investment 
parameters for each fund. 
This ensures a consistency of 
approach across the Group. 
Investment Committee members 
are appointed based on their 
expertise in the product area.

Our investment teams remain 
fully engaged with every 
asset throughout its life cycle. 
They have regular engagement 
with management and 
sponsors and receive regular 
and timely management 
information. Where appropriate 
our teams proactively work 
to resolve problems with the 
aim of preserving the value of 
our investment.

On at least a quarterly basis, the 
Investment Committees review 
each investment’s performance 
with the relevant investment team.

We provide returns to our 
investors, and generate revenue 
for the Group, throughout 
the life of an asset, through a 
combination of the asset’s income 
returns and capital growth.

We aim to maximise the 
proceeds by proactively 
realising assets once they reach 
maturity within the portfolio. 
The realisation of an asset 
crystallises accumulated interest 
and capital growth, contributes 
to generating performance fees 
and supports our long standing 
investment track record.

At every point in the value chain we manage key risks to deliver our strategy. Read more on page 28.

risk management

Cash generated from the business is both reinvested in the business to facilitate future growth 
and returned to shareholders, principally in the form of dividends. In the last three years we 
have returned £223.2m to shareholders through dividends.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014bUsiNess  
MODel

hOW We  
are 
strUctUreD

hoW our business model has evolved

Our business model is evolving to reflect the 
Group’s strategic shift towards becoming 
predominantly a third party asset manager. 
We are organised into two businesses, the 
Fund Management Company (FMC) and the 
Investment Company (IC), which are supported 
by a common infrastructure platform. 

The IC is at the heart of ICG’s principal 
investor origins. It uses our balance sheet 
funding to provide long term support to the 
FMC’s third party funds, either through a 
predetermined co-investment ratio, fund 
investment or seed capital. Increasingly the 
IC’s resources are being used to launch and 
develop new funds, thereby facilitating the 
expansion of the Group’s product suite, in 
response to market opportunities, and growth 
of the FMC.

The FMC is the operating business of the 
Group, sourcing and managing investments 
on behalf of third party funds and the IC. 
The transition to being a third party asset 
manager will result in the FMC becoming 
a greater contributor to Group profitability, 
with predictable revenue streams and 
increasing operating leverage. The evolution 
of the business model to grow the FMC has 
included the development of a dedicated 
in house distribution team to build investor 
relationships and source investment into 
our funds.

Both the IC and FMC are supported by a 
common, scalable infrastructure platform 
to support the growth of the business in an 
increasingly complex regulatory environment.

the Fund management company  
(Fmc)
The FMC is the operating business of ICG plc that sources and manages  
investments on behalf of third party funds and the IC.

the investment  
company (ic)
The IC is the investment  
business of ICG plc.

private debt  
and minority equity

ICG’s funds invest in 
mezzanine and minority 
equity assets of proven 
mid market companies with  
leading market positions.

credit  
Funds

ICG credit funds deploy  
third party capital  
investing in senior loans  
and high yield bonds of  
proven mid market  
companies.

real estate  
debt

ICG Longbow’s  
funds deploy third party  
capital investing in real  
estate mezzanine  
and senior debt.

balance sheet 
investments

The Investment  
Company co-invests  
alongside third party  
funds at predetermined 
ratios, invests in funds  
and provides seed  
capital to launch and  
develop new funds.

distribution 

ICG’s in house distribution team raises third party capital for new funds.

Infrastructure teams support all aspects of the business covering operations, finance, HR, legal and compliance.

inFrastructure

10 / 11

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategyperformance  and prioritiesmarketplaceyear in reviewRISKSReSouRceS andRelatIonShIpSWe are committed to financial discipline, 
both in terms of the quality of investment 
and strategic allocation of resources, as 
well as ensuring that an appropriate capital 
structure is maintained. Capital is allocated 
to strategies that are expected to create 
long term value. Consideration is given 
to maintaining broad access to financing 
sources and to debt markets, to regulatory 
requirements and to ensure the Group is 
sufficiently robust to withstand periods of 
market stress.

We will seek to maximise shareholder value 
by utilising our available capital to prioritise 
investment in opportunities which over a 
number of years will add sustainable income 
streams to the business and optimise our 
return on equity. 

We understand the value that shareholders 
place on regular and sustainable dividend 
payments and we remain committed to a 
dividend policy linked to cash core income 
(see page 132 for definition). In addition, 
to the extent that we believe there is any 
material excess capital, we will return capital 
to our shareholders.

buSineSS modeL
continued

hOW  
We Use OUr 
capital

capital management

Grow the business to maximise shareholder returns

Maintaining access to  
capital markets and strong  
credit rating

Withstand periods  
of market stress

Satisfy regulatory  
requirements

invest

realisations and Fees

distribution

investing to groW the Fund 
management business

Co-investment with and investment in funds that are:

– Established

– New

– In development 

shareholder 
distributions

– Dividends – linked to cash core income

– Surplus capital returned to shareholders 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014bUsiNess  
MODel

our key resources and relationships

You can read more about the key resources 
and relationships that enable our business 
model to function on page 36

resources
 – Investment management skills
 – Distribution capabilities
 – Scalable infrastructure

relationships
 – Third party investors
 – Key finance counterparties
 – Regulators
 – Asset sourcing networks
 – Asset owners and management

our competitive advantages

The combination of our outstanding 
investment track record over 25 years, 
expanding product range and the 
support of a strong balance sheet are 
significant differentiators when raising 
third party money. 

Our client relationships, enhanced by the 
presence of our own distribution team, have 
continued to grow in breadth and depth, 
with recent fundraisings having a more 
geographically and institutionally diverse 
investor base. Our dedicated marketing 
and distribution team should enable us to 
build stronger and broader relationships 
which will further support us achieving 
our strategic priority of growing assets 
under management.

We have a consistent investment culture 
across all our products. This is based on 
a disciplined investment process, core 
credit principles and with a strong focus 
on capital preservation.

Each investment opportunity is assessed 
on its own merits and in the context of the 
expected risk and return requirements of 
the fund. Particularly we consider limiting 
the downside risk of the investment and 
the underlying focus is on generating 
cash returns through the life of the asset. 
Our investment strategy is underpinned by 
rigorous risk analysis.

We have local teams and sector specialists 
who speak the languages and understand 
the dynamics of the markets in which they 
operate. These investment teams have 
established our reputation as a trusted 
and experienced partner with innovative 
structuring skills. Our investments are 
tailored to provide a financing solution 
that fits the cash flows of the underlying 
asset to maximise value for our investors. 
Our local teams have built longstanding 
relationships with local sponsors, banks, 
advisers, and management teams, 
providing deal flow and early access to 
investment opportunities.

Post investment monitoring is a key focus 
of both our investment teams and the 
Investment Committees. Our investment 
professionals and credit analysts are 
responsible for attending management 
meetings, reviewing management data 
and following industry trends. 

We typically seek Board attendance rights 
from portfolio companies in our mezzanine 
funds, currently attending approximately 
85% of the Boards of our portfolio 
companies. Board representation assists 
in effective portfolio management of illiquid 
assets as it provides access to management, 
additional insight into financial information 
and gives the opportunity to build and 
strengthen relationships with stakeholders. 
These relationships have provided a 
significant number of both follow-on and 
new investment opportunities for our funds.

Close monitoring of investments enables 
us to identify risks within the portfolio at an 
early stage. Our investment professionals 
have experience in default situations and 
in the recovery of investments. We use 
this experience to engage proactively 
in restructuring situations and thereby 
maximise our returns from these 
investments. Our investment and monitoring 
processes have supported our outstanding 
track record since inception, with our funds 
performing strongly against their peers.

Our portfolio management and realisation 
decisions are not driven by short term 
considerations. We support our investments 
over the long term. The availability of flexible 
capital, both from our balance sheet and the 
funds, supports sponsors and management 
in achieving profit and cash generation which 
enables us to achieve outstanding returns 
on realisation. This has been the basis of 
our long term success.

The realisation of our existing portfolio of 
investments not only generates cash returns 
for existing investors, but also acts as a 
source of investment opportunities for new 
funds. The speed and flexibility with which 
we are able to complete these transactions 
is enhanced by our relationships with 
management and deep understanding 
of the investment.

12 / 13

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategyperformance  and prioritiesmarketplaceyear in reviewRISKSReSouRceS andRelatIonShIpSouR mARKetS

Change in the global economic environment, particularly in the 
availability of investment capital, is the most significant market  
driver influencing the delivery of the group’s strategic priorities. 
market conditions which support the group’s fundraising efforts  
to grow assets under management typically create a more competitive 
environment in which to invest selectively.

These changing 
dynamics in the 
financing market have 
given the Group a 
favourable landscape 
against which to 
fundraise and grow 
assets under 
management.

market revieW

As has become increasingly the case over 
the past five years, the single most important 
factor driving our markets is the impact of non 
conventional monetary policies. As central 
banks have stepped in to stimulate growth 
and balance the absence of government 
latitude in economic policy, financial markets 
have been gradually flooded with liquidity. 
This increased level of cash in the market, 
combined with interest rates driven to 
historically low levels, and a decline in the 
banks’ appetite to lend to mid market 
corporates have given rise to a new lending 
landscape. As an alternative asset manager, 
there are significant opportunities offered by 
this market to continue our growth 
and development.

Fundraising market

The fundraising market has become 
increasingly favourable to well established 
fund managers as institutional investors 
– corporate pension funds, insurance 
companies, local authorities, sovereign 
wealth funds and other financial institutions 
– have significant cash available to deploy. 
In order to compensate for the poor returns 
generated by traditional asset classes such 
as equities and fixed income, in which these 
institutions predominantly invest, they also 
allocate capital to alternative asset classes 
more and more. These have the benefit 
of providing portfolio diversity as well as 
increasing the return potential by taking 
more risk. This shift is exacerbated by the 

significant growth in market liquidity which 
pushes further the appetite of investors for 
alternative asset classes. 

As at the end of March there were over 
2,100 private equity type funds in the 
market targeting an aggregate of $750bn 
in commitments, of which 26% were 
targeted towards mezzanine and real estate 
strategies. There is little doubt that the 
combination of liquidity and a more frantic 
search for yield have made fundraising less 
challenging than in the aftermath of the 
financial crisis. In spite of this, we still see 
investors continuing to favour caution and 
those established fund managers who can 
evidence a long established and reliable 
track record. This cautiousness is evidenced 
in the time taken to raise first time funds, 
which generally remains high. 

These changing dynamics in the financing 
market have given the Group a favourable 
landscape against which to fundraise and 
grow assets under management. Further, 
by broadening our product range and 
geographical footprint, we have become 
increasingly attractive to investors seeking 
to award multi-strategy or geographically 
diversified mandates.

credit market

Whilst there continues to be significant 
differences between the regions, sectors and 
asset classes in which we operate there are 
some common features that provide a broad 
context to these markets.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014Marketplace

Over the last four years bank lending into 
the mid market has declined sharply. 
Whilst banks have not completely withdrawn 
from corporate assets or real estate lending, 
we expect that their appetite to lend to 
mid market corporates and real estate will 
remain muted.

Financing history tends to show that 
financing gaps do not extend for lengthy 
periods. As banks reduced their exposure, 
they left a void which is now being filled by 
institution led financing and specialist asset 
managers such as ICG, supported by a 
healthy fundraising market. New institutional 
entrants into the market combined with 
growing investor confidence in the stability 
of the Eurozone are now creating an 
increasingly competitive environment in the 
loan and high yield markets. The availability 
of senior debt and sponsors’ unused 
capital means the demand for traditional 
mezzanine financing remains low. Further, 
the competition for assets means that 
both pricing and terms are under pressure 
in Europe. In this market, the combined 
strength of our local origination teams, 
innovative structuring skills and sector 
specialists come to the fore as and we are 
able to continue to source deals for our 
originated funds, while limiting any pressure 
on terms.

European CLO issuance, which had been 
fairly modest since the financial crisis, has 
made a limited comeback. Those institutions 
that have been able to issue CLOs are 
the larger institutions, like us, who have 
the capacity to meet the regulatory 
requirement to invest at least 5% of any 
fund. The recovery of the market is also 
hindered by the uncertainty surrounding the 
treatment of investments into CLOs by US 
banks. In spite of this relatively slow recovery, 
there has been no shortage of liquidity in the 
syndicated loan market. CLOs are the most 
prevalent form of loan investment vehicles 
but across European markets institutional 
investors have been increasingly active, 
buying loans directly, or through separately 
managed accounts. As the bond market 
continued to be extremely liquid, larger 
companies have had little difficulty getting 
financed. The buyout market has been 
impacted by the combined competition 
of corporate M&A activity and a buoyant 
IPO market, rather than from the lack of 
available financing. 

The direct lending market has been more 
attractive as this is the segment which 
has suffered the most from the gradual 
withdrawal of the banks. 2014 has seen 
more normalised conditions with an 
increased number of direct lending funds 
compensating for the weakness of bank 
finance. Lending conditions overall remain 
attractive and conducive to the development 
of a lending strategy for the long term.

The UK commercial real estate market is 
seeing an increased level of activity. To date 
this has been across the risk spectrum, 
with attractive opportunities in senior debt 
and whole loans as well as mezzanine. 
The banks have begun lending, but they 
remain minority players, have lengthy 
approval processes and appear to be 
limiting their support to their core client base. 

The US market is buoyant with high levels 
of inflows into CLOs and mutual funds. 
The CLO market is still very active despite the 
uncertainty surrounding the implementation 
of part of the Dodd-Frank Act which 
restricts certain US banks from holding 
bonds, including CLO debt tranches, as an 
investment. The very liquid credit markets 
combined with well capitalised sponsors 
make the competition for assets, particularly 
for larger companies, quite intense. 
Sponsors are well capitalised and whilst 
the new deal flow has increased from 2012, 
there remains a very limited supply.

Across the Asia Pacific market there has 
been steady growth. Principal sources 
of capital for investment are the banks, 
local sovereign wealth and pension funds. 
Only Australia has an embryonic institutional 
debt market. The region is relatively well 
funded with ample liquidity for investment 
making competition for assets high, 
particularly companies with enterprise 
values in excess of $200m. The supply of 
new deals is limited, and the current focus 
is the optimisation of financing structures 
for existing buyouts and maximising returns 
to the equity sponsors. In this complex and 
diverse market, origination skills and length 
of experience are particularly important 
and allow our team to continue winning 
new business.

8.0
$tr

Additional capital  
issued by central banks  
since 2008

14 / 15

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelyear in reviewRISKSpeRfoRmance  and pRIoRItIeSReSouRceS andRelatIonShIpSoPeRAting RevieW

Record fundraising year across products and a record period  
of realisations leaves third party Aum up 8%.

groW our assets 
under management

A key measure of the success of our strategy 
to grow the fund management business is 
our ability to grow assets under management. 
New AUM (inflows) is our best lead indicator to 
sustainable future fee streams and therefore 
increasing the profitability of the FMC. 

third party mezzanine Funds 

Third party mezzanine funds under 
management have decreased by 16% to 
€3.7bn in the period due to the realisation 
of assets in the older European and Asia 
Pacific funds.

At €3.8bn, we have had another record 
breaking fundraising year, raising more third 
party money in a single financial year than 
ever before, across multiple products and 
in multiple geographies. Of this, 45% of 
the fundraising was in relation to first time 
funds, introducing brand new sustainable fee 
streams to the Group. As these funds charge 
fees on invested capital the fees will ramp up 
during the investment period. This is further 
evidence that the investment made in recent 
years is helping us to deliver our strategy.

After a sustained period of low realisations, 
we saw a significant increase in the number 
of realisations during the year. The cash 
generated from these realisations is proving 
to be a competitive advantage enabling the 
Group to invest in developing a broad range 
of new products.

In the year to 31 March 2014, AUM increased 
0.4% to €13.0bn as the outflows from the 
high level of realisations offset the fundraising 
inflows. As expected, the impact of realising 
the older, pre 2010, assets has been felt 
principally by the balance sheet portfolio, 
down 24%, as the balance sheet had 
contributed more than third party funds to 
each investment. Third party funds have 
increased 8% to €10.7bn.

On the fundraising front, since the year end 
we have had a $450m first close on our US 
Private Debt fund, which included $200m 
from ICG. We have also recently begun 
to market our third Asia Pacific fund 
and we expect a first close during FY15. 

Preparations are also well advanced for the 
launch of a domestic Japanese mezzanine 
fund through our 50:50 partnership with 
Nomura. This strategic partnership was 
signed in November 2013 and will facilitate 
the structuring and distribution of new 
domestic mezzanine investments and 
funds in Japan. 

credit Funds

Third party credit funds under management 
have increased 15% to €5.7bn, with the new 
AUM of €3.0bn raised in the year outstripping 
the runoff of our older CLO funds and a 
reduction in private mandates.

The growth of AUM is directly attributable to 
the success of our direct lending product, 
Senior Debt Partners, which raised €1.3bn 
during the year. Aligned to this product is 
a mandate of £163m (€191m) of Business 
Finance Partnership funds received from 
HM Treasury, which will be invested in mid 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014market companies across the UK. Since the 
year end, a further €0.3bn of AUM has been 
raised closing the strategy at its maximum 
permitted size of €1.7bn, well in excess of the 
€1.0bn target. 

The European CLO market has made a 
tentative return during the year. Our strong 
balance sheet is proving to be a competitive 
advantage in this market as the European 
Capital Requirements Directive requires 
institutions to contribute at least 5% to the 
CLOs they manage. During the financial year 
we raised a total of €1.3bn in three CLOs 
making us the largest issuer in Europe over 
this period. We also took the opportunity to 
extend existing fee streams by using the new 
CLOs to acquire assets from the redemption 
of the Eurocredit Opportunities Parallel Fund 
and the partial redemption of ICG Eos Loan 
Fund 1 Limited. Offsetting the new AUM 
was the runoff of older funds, the net impact 
being a reduction in European CLO AUM of 
€0.1bn.

Over the last two years, we have invested 
in expanding our US presence which has 
enabled us to raise our first dedicated US 
product during the year, a $371m US CLO, 
including $41m from ICG. This gives us a 
strong base from which to raise further CLOs 
and leverage our investment in the product. 

Our multi-asset credit strategies fund 
Total Credit continues to build a strong track 
record since its inception. The fund has seen 
a 25% increase in NAV since it was launched 
in July 2012 and returned 10% in the year. 
This is a good platform from which our 
distribution team can raise third party funds.

We continue to invest in broadening 
our product range and have recently 
hired a team to support the launch of an 
alternative credit fund. Elsewhere, we are 
marketing an Australian Senior Loans fund 
for which the balance sheet is currently 
warehousing assets. 

year iN  
revieW

real estate Funds

Third party real estate funds under 
management have increased 139% in 
the year to €1.3bn as our UK real estate 
business, ICG Longbow, continues to 
perform strongly.

During the year we closed the third ICG 
Longbow mezzanine fund at its maximum 
permitted size of £700m, including £50m 
from ICG. This was well above our original 
target of £500m and considerably more than 
the predecessor fund which raised £242m. 

We continue to seek to build on our 
UK real estate investment skills with an 
expanded product offering. This has led 
to ICG Longbow being awarded a £150m 
segregated mandate from a UK pension 
fund during the year and the recruitment of 
a small team with an expertise in German 
real estate. 

Record fundraising 
year across products 
and a record period 
of realisations leaves 
AUM at €13.0bn.

3.8
€bn

Third party funds 
raised in the year

16 / 17

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsfundS oveRvieW

Fundraising

investor diversity
The Group is seeking to establish and build 
relationships with fund investors across 
a broad range of asset classes. This year 
the distribution team has been particularly 
successful in building relationships with 
pension funds and insurance companies 
as banks withdraw from the market.

5 7

1

FUNDS
RAISED IN
FY14 

2

3

4

7

1

6

ACROSS
ALL
FUNDS

5

3

2

4

1  Asset manager 
2  Fund of funds 
3  Insurance companies 
4  Pension 
5  Sovereign wealth funds 
6  Bank 
7  Other 

14%
1%
21%
58%
2%
–
4%

1  Asset manager 
2  Fund of funds 
3  Insurance companies 
4  Pension 
5  Sovereign wealth funds 
6  Bank 
7  Other 

11%
11%
16%
31%
23%
4%
4%

geographic diversity
With staff based across Europe, Asia, 
America and the Middle East, our distribution 
team is able to reach more investors 
across the globe. The Group is seeking 
a geographically diverse investor base. 
Funds raised during FY14 have been 
particularly suited to European investors 
and this is reflected in the geographic profile.

2

3

1

FUNDS
RAISED IN
FY14

1

ACROSS
ALL
FUNDS

3

2

1  Asia Pacific 
2  USA and Canada 
3  Europe and Middle East 

10%
9%
81%

1  Asia Pacific 
2  USA and Canada 
3  Europe and Middle East 

31%
12%
57%

direct investment funds

Fund

Third party money

Estimated money 
multiple

% carry*

mezzanine 
Fund 2003

european 
Fund 2006

europe  
Fund v

recovery  
Fund 2008

minority 
partners 2008

icap  
2005

icap  
2008

senior debt 
partners 2008

€1,420m

€1,750m

€2,000m

€840m

€120m

$300m

$600m

$589m

1.6x

1.5x

1.6x

1.5x

1.9x

1.6x

1.6x

1.2x

25% of 20 
over 8

20% of 20 
over 8

20% of 20 
over 8

20% of 20 
over 8

20% of 20 
over 8

25% of 20 
over 8

20% of 20 
over 8

20% of 15 
over 6

* Total carry is a fixed percentage of the fund gains. For example, in Mezzanine Fund 2003 the carry is 20% of gains and the Group is entitled to 25% of this. Carry is triggered when 
fund returns exceed a hurdle, for Mezzanine Fund 2003 this is 8%.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
year iN  
revieW

Funds overvieW

FUND TYPE

CURRENT FUNDS

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

r

r

r

r

ICG Mezzanine Fund III 2003

ICG Europe Fund IV 2006

ICG Europe Fund V

ICG Minority Partners Fund 2008

ICG Recovery Fund 2008

Intermediate Capital Asia Pacific Fund II 2008

Intermediate Capital Asia Pacific Mezzanine Fund I 2005

Confluent I Ltd

Eos Loan Fund I

Eurocredit CDO II B.V. 2000

Eurocredit CDO III 2003

Eurocredit CDO IV 2004

Eurocredit CDO V PLC 2006

Eurocredit CDO VI PLC 2006

Eurocredit CDO VII 2007

Eurocredit CDO VIII PLC 2007

Eurocredit Opportunities Fund I PLC 2005

Eurocredit Opportunities Parallel Funding I

St Paul’s CLO I B.V. 2010

St Paul’s II (CLO)

St Paul’s III (CLO)

St Paul’s IV (CLO)

US CLO I

European Investment Fund I

European Investment Fund II

ICG European High Yield Bond Fund I

ICG European Loan Fund

Segregated Mandates

ICG Senior Debt Partners Fund I

ICG Total Credit Fund

Longbow UK Real Estate Debt Investments II

ICG Longbow Senior Secured UK Property Debt Investments Limited

ICG Longbow UK Real Estate Debt Investments III

Longbow Senior Debt Fund

total

Fund type key

m   MEzzANINE  c   CREDIT FUNDS   r   REAL ESTATE

Fy14

status

Realisation

Realisation

Fy13 

aum(€)

status

103.3

682.4

Realisation

Realisation

aum(€)

216.6

1,145.3

Investment

2,000.0

Investment

2,000.0

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Redeemed

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Fundraising

Fundraising

Investment

20.1

Realisation

420.1

435.7

Realisation

Investment

16.3

Realisation

165.6

237.2

0.0

80.9

103.2

316.9

334.0

393.8

260.9

103.7

Investment

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Realisation

Investment

Realisation

Realisation

2.5

Realisation

277.8

387.5

528.8

419.8

238.7

72.7

93.0

54.3

45.6

7.9

Investment

–

–

–

–

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Investment

Fundraising

1,381.5

Fundraising

Fundraising

Realisation

Investment

Investment

Fundraising

211.2

193.3

111.6

787.3

181.7

Fundraising

Realisation

Investment

Fundraising

–

20.1

439.9

466.9

106.4

387.7

838.0

11.3

165.3

165.3

467.2

444.6

455.2

401.0

132.4

375.8

287.0

–

–

–

–

71.8

97.8

49.3

73.4

364.2

92.0

92.0

228.4

109.2

195.5

–

10,669.3

9,899.6

18 / 19

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsoPeRAting RevieW  
continued

invest selectively

We have a good 
pipeline of investment 
opportunities and 
significant capital to 
deploy. However, we 
will remain extremely 
selective and maintain 
our historical rigour 
in making investment 
decisions. 

The investment environment is highly 
competitive and our teams have to work hard 
to source and execute transactions. We are 
therefore delighted to have continued the 
pace of investment during the year across 
all our direct investment funds whilst at the 
same time maintaining our credit discipline. 
Our ability to commit and deploy capital 
quickly is proving to be a key advantage in 
this competitive market.

The total amount of capital deployed on 
behalf of the direct investment funds where 
we originate deals was £1.5bn in the year, a 
185% increase on the prior year. In addition, 
our Investment Company invested a total of 
£393.5m in the year, compared to £261.9m 
in the prior year. The investment rate for 
Senior Debt Partners and ICG Longbow 
Real Estate III has a direct impact on FMC 
income as fees are charged on an invested 
capital basis.

The direct investment funds are investing 
at the required pace. We closed eight 
deals in ICG Europe Fund V during the 
year, taking the fund to 58% invested, 
halfway through its investment period, and 
completed one further deal since the year 
end. Our ICG Longbow Real Estate Fund 
III is 37% invested after signing a further 10 
deals, with nine months left of its investment 
period and Senior Debt Partners is 42% 
invested completing 17 deals, a third of the 
way through its investment period. Our Asia 
Pacific Fund II was 77% invested at the end 
of its investment period after signing three 
further deals during the year. We have also 
completed one deal in North America. 

Our top 10 individual investments made 
during the year across the direct investment 
funds are:

Company

Euro Cater

zenith

Vitaldent

Apem

Mec3

Nora

Fund

Europe V

Industry 

Retail

Country

£m*

Denmark

169.4

SDP

Business services

Europe V

Europe V

Europe V

Healthcare

Electronics

Food products

UK

Spain

France

Italy

Europe V

Building materials

Germany

Westbury Street Holdings

Europe V

Catering

Inenco

Ideal Stelrad

Leaders

Total

Europe V

Business services

SDP

Industrial materials

SDP Management services

*Total amount invested on behalf of the fund and our balance sheet.

UK

UK

UK

UK

84.9

84.7

79.1

73.8

71.7

70.0

67.5

66.5

64.0

831.6

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014year iN  
revieW

manage portFolios  
to maximise value

We have a good pipeline of investment 
opportunities and significant capital to 
deploy. However, we will remain extremely 
selective and maintain our historical rigour in 
making investment decisions

After a period where companies were 
unable to access debt, we saw an increased 
availability of finance in the market during 
the year. This provided the opportunity for 
a number of companies to refinance their 
existing debt facilities and led to a record 
year for realisations with the full or partial 
repayment of 12 of our top 20 assets. 
The pace of realisations stabilised in the 
second half of the financial year and this rate 
has continued into the new financial year.

We have realised over £1.1bn of cash for 
our Investment Company during the year. 
In most cases we have retained our minority 
equity positions in our realised assets. As a 
result, the average internal rate of return 
from the assets realised in the year of 14% 
will increase once these assets are fully 
exited. This makes our portfolios some 
of the best performing of their respective 
vintages, generating good returns for our 
fund investors and cementing our excellent 
track record.

Net realised capital gains in the period of 
£140.8m are primarily due to the exit from 
Allflex, a company the balance sheet had 
been invested in since 1998. Elsewhere there 
has been a low level of realised capital 
gains as companies within our portfolios 
have refinanced rather than undergone a 
full exit process. As the performance of the 
underlying companies improves thereby 
increasing their valuation, combined with the 

return of the IPO market and the pressure of 
sponsors to return cash to their investors, we 
expect the number of full exits to increase.

The Investment Company’s portfolio 
continues to demonstrate resilience, 
with 67% of our portfolio companies by 
number (75% on a value weighted average 
basis) performing above or at the same 
level as the previous year. Our investment 
teams have been actively engaged in the 
restructuring of six portfolio companies 
during the year. Since their restructuring 
these companies are beginning to 
show signs of improved performance. 
There remains a small number of weaker 
companies within the portfolio who continue 
to underperform and show no signs 
of recovery. The fair value of our equity 
portfolio increased £32.9m during the year. 

During the year we took asset specific 
impairments against our weaker assets, 
resulting in gross provisions of £133.6m 
compared to £141.1m in the last financial 
year. This includes a provision of £17.3m 
taken on the restructuring of an asset with 
a corresponding uplift in unrealised capital 
gains. After write backs of £21.2m during 
the year, and excluding the provision against 
the restructured asset, net impairments 
were £95.1m compared to £80.0m last year. 
Whilst we do not expect that aggregate net 
provisions will exceed our long term average 
in the foreseeable future, to the extent that 
they are required, provisions are likely to 
remain lumpy as we continue to closely 
monitor our weaker assets.

key priorities For the current year

In the year ahead we aim to maintain 
and build on our third party fundraising 
momentum across a broader range of 
products than ever before: 

 – Existing strategies – launching the third 
Asia Pacific fund and further CLOs

 – New geographies – US debt, Australian 
Senior Loans and Japanese mezzanine

 – New products – Alternative Credit 

The first time funds will contribute incremental 
fee streams to the Group and with the 
successor funds increasing the operating 
leverage of the Fund Management Company. 

We have generated significant capital to 
deploy in new funds raised over the last two 
years, and have ambitious fundraising targets 
for FY15. We aim to deploy the capital raised 
in line with the required investment run rate, 
subject to finding investment opportunities 
with the appropriate risk/return balance. 
We will maintain our disciplined approach 
to investment in a highly competitive market.

We aim to maximise returns in older funds 
by realising assets to crystallise value for 
the balance sheet and our fund investors. 
The timing of these realisations remains 
uncertain as they are rarely in the Group’s 
control. Since the year end, Applus+, our 
largest single asset, has listed, triggering the 
repayment of the majority of our investment. 
During FY15 we will continue to actively 
manage our portfolios and to proactively 
work with management and sponsors on 
working through problems to enhance 
performance and maximise returns. 

20 / 21

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsfinAnCiAL RevieW

This review provides an overview of the group’s financial 
performance, position and cash flow for the year ending 
31 march 2014. 

The information presented in this review excludes the balance sheet impact of consolidating 
the US CLO (see note 5 to the financial statements).

overvieW

During the year we made strong underlying progress in the development of our fund 
management business, although this is not yet readily visible in the FMC profit. The IC 
also had a strong year with record levels of realisations and cash generation. Overall, the 
Group’s profit before tax for the year was up 11% at £158.7m (2013: £142.6m).

Fund Management Company

Investment Company

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

The adjusted profit of the IC and Group 
excludes the impact of the fair value 
charge on hedging derivatives of £16.4m 
(2013: £5.7m). Throughout this review all 
numbers are presented excluding this 
adjusting item. 

The effective tax rate for the period is 13% 
(2013: 13%). The effective tax rate benefits 
from the current year release of £8.6m of 
tax risk provisions and, in the prior year, 
the impact of a £9.0m credit relating to 
termination payments made in the prior year 
under the Medium Term Incentive Scheme. 
Excluding these non recurring credits, the 
effective tax rate was 19% (2013: 20%). 

Unadjusted

Adjusted

2013
£m

40.4

102.2

142.6

(18.8)

123.8

2014
£m

35.0

140.1

175.1

(21.3)

153.8

2013
£m

40.4

107.9

148.3

(18.8)

129.5

2014 
£m

35.0

123.7

158.7

(21.3)

137.4

The Group generated an adjusted ROE 
of 10.2% (2013: 8.9%), an increase on prior 
year reflecting higher profit after tax driven 
by higher capital gains and dividend income 
in the period. Adjusted earnings per share 
for the period were 39.9p (2013: 33.6p). 

The Group has continued to diversify its 
sources of financing, signing £266.0m 
of new facilities during the year. This, 
combined with the cash generated from 
realisations and facilities previously signed 
becoming available, has resulted in £678.3m 
of unutilised cash and debt facilities at 
31 March 2014. 

philip keller
Chief Financial Officer

137.4
£m

Profit after tax

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014year iN  
revieW

The movement in the Group’s unutilised cash 
and debt facilities during the year is detailed 
as follows: 

The Group had net current assets of £217.0m (2013: £409.4m net current liabilities) at the 
end of the year. The increase in net current assets is driven by cash from a strong year of 
realisations being used to repay borrowings. 

Headroom at 31 March 2013

Bank facilities matured

Private placements matured

£m

355.2

(632.6)

(146.9)

The Board has recommended a final dividend of 14.4p per share (2013: 13.7p), which will 
result in a full year dividend of 21.0p per share (2013: 20.0p). In addition, the Board has 
announced its intention to buy back up to £100m of its share capital over the coming 
12 months. 

Secured floating rate notes matured (153.3)

assets under management 

New bank facilities available

New private placements

New medium term note

498.5

89.9

40.3

Movement in cash and drawn debt

628.7

Other (including FX)

(1.5)

headroom at 31 march 2014

678.3

The Board has 
announced its 
intention to buy back 
up to £100m of its 
share capital over the 
coming 12 months. 

AUM as at 31 March 2014 increased to €12,980m (2013: €12,930m) as fundraising offset a 
24% reduction in the IC investment portfolio and a 16% reduction in our mezzanine funds. 
AUM by business line is detailed below, where all figures are quoted in €m. 

Mezzanine and equity funds

Real estate funds

Credit funds

Total third party AUM

IC investment portfolio

Total AUM

2014  
€m

2013 
€m

Change
%

3,678

1,274

5,717

10,669

2,311

12,980

4,395

533

4,972

9,900

3,030

12,930

(16)

139

15

8

(24)

0

There were two significant trends underlying the movement in AUM during the year. 
The Group achieved record levels of inflows into our real estate and credit funds, offset by 
the realisation of assets in our older mezzanine funds and CLOs. This is illustrated in the AUM 
bridge below. 

Mezzanine and 
equity funds
€m

Real estate
funds
€m 

Credit 
funds
€m

Total
third party AUM
€m

At 1 April 2013

Additions

Realisations

FX and other

4,395

–

(704)

(13)

533

875

(59)

(75)

at 31 march 2014

3,678

1,274

4,972

2,972

(2,210)

(17)

5,717

9,900

3,847

(2,973)

(105)

10,669

The €3.8bn of new AUM includes €1.7bn relating to first time funds, of which €1.3bn is 
Senior Debt Partners, our direct lending strategy. The advantage of first time funds is that they 
introduce a new long term revenue stream to the business. Furthermore, given that a strategy 
will typically reach maturity on its third fund the fee stream growth from any new strategy will 
be more visible into the medium term. The development of ICG Longbow, our UK real estate 
business, illustrates this point as their third fund closed during the year at £700m, upscaled 
189% from their £242m second fund. Once fully invested the third fund will generate an 
annualised £8.0m of fee income compared to £2.6m on the second fund.

The IC investment portfolio was impacted by realisations as the balance sheet contributed 
more than third party funds to each investment prior to 2010. A total of 80% of the assets 
realised in our mezzanine and equity funds were 2008 or earlier investments. Likewise the 
older vintage CLOs were also impacted by realisations. 

22 / 23

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsfinAnCiAL RevieW
continued

Fund management company

99.6
£m

Fee income

Fee income 

Third party fee income increased 2% in the year to £78.9m (2013: £77.4m), although total fee 
income decreased by 1% in the year to £99.6m (2013: £100.7m) as a consequence of the 
reduction in size of the IC portfolio, as detailed below. 

Mezzanine and equity funds

Real estate funds

Credit funds

Total third party funds

IC management fee

Total fee income

Mezzanine and equity third party fees include 
£13.9m of carried interest (2013: £0.3m) 
earned across European Mezzanine Fund 
2003 and Asia Pacific Fund 2005 as the 
realisation of assets from these vintages 
helped trigger the performance hurdles. 
Also included is £1.2m (2013: £7.0m) of ICG 
Europe Fund V catch up fees received in 
respect of prior periods. 

Fees for our real estate and credit products 
are typically charged on an invested basis, 
although this has little impact for the CLOs 
which are invested quickly. The money raised 
during the year will have an annualised fee 
impact of £23.2m once those funds are fully 
invested. These funds contributed £6.3m of 
fees during FY14. 

Real estate third party fee income has 
increased 113% with the investment of the 
ICG Longbow Fund III and Senior Debt Fund. 

2014 
£m

53.6

6.4

18.9

78.9

20.7

99.6

2013
£m

55.2

3.0

19.2

77.4

23.3

100.7

Change
%

(3)

113

(1)

2

(11)

(1)

Credit funds third party fee income on the 
older credit funds continues to decrease as 
these funds are in their realisation phase. 
This is offset by increased fee income on 
more recently launched strategies such 
as Senior Debt Partners and Total Credit, 
generating fees as those funds are invested.

operating expenses 

Operating expenses of the FMC were 
£65.5m (2013: £61.8m), including 
salaries and incentive scheme costs. 
Salaries were £23.5m (2013: £20.9m) as 
average headcount has increased from  
161 to 195. This increase is directly related 
to investing in the growth areas of the 
business – building the US platform, 
extending the credit fund product offering 
and supporting the growth of our real 
estate business. Other administrative costs 
of £28.4m (2013: £26.3m) have increased 
more slowly at 8% year on year as we have 
increased IT and occupancy costs from 
our newly opened office in Singapore and 
the expansion of our US team. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014investment company

1,914
£m

Balance sheet  
investment portfolio

year iN  
revieW

balance sheet investments

The significant level of realisations during the year has resulted in the balance sheet investment 
portfolio reducing to £1,914m at 31 March 2014. The full or partial realisation of 28 of the 
Group’s assets, including 12 of the top 20, has left a well funded balance sheet to meet the 
demands of a growing business. The expansion of our product suite will place additional 
demands on our capital to seed new funds. In addition, the Group’s expanding footprint 
means that we are undertaking more regulated activities which also place demands on our 
capital. The impact of the realisations is illustrated in the investment portfolio bridge below:

At 1 April 2013

New and follow on investments

Accrued interest income

Realisations

Impairments

FX and other

At 31 March 2014

£m

2,696

393

133

(1,121)

(112)

(75)

1,914

Realisation include the return of £757.4m of principal and the crystallisation of £226.4m of 
rolled up interest and £137.4m of realised capital gains. 

Investments in the period comprise £181.1m of capital invested in our credit and real estate 
funds and £212.4m co-investment alongside our mezzanine funds for new and follow on 
investments. New investments in the period include Euro Cater, Vitaldent and Mec3 in Europe, 
and Cura in Australia. 

The Sterling value of the portfolio decreased by £77.8m due to foreign exchange 
movements. The portfolio is 69% Euro denominated and 12% US dollar denominated. 
Sterling denominated assets only account for 10% of the portfolio. 

An analysis of the portfolio by instrument is outlined below. 

Senior mezzanine and senior debt

Junior mezzanine

Interest bearing equity

Non interest bearing equity

Co-investment portfolio

Seed capital in credit funds

Total balance sheet portfolio

2014  
£m

% 
of total

665

77

302

581

1,625

289

1,914

35

4

16

30

85

15

100

2013 
£m

1,246

427

336

504

2,513

183

2,696

% 
of total

46

16

12

19

93

7

100

The non interest bearing equity component of the portfolio has increased in the year. This is 
in part due to the Group retaining its minority equity position in assets it has otherwise been 
refinanced out. It is also reflective of the Group undertaking more sponsorless transactions 
requiring it to invest more in non interest bearing equity.

24 / 25

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsfinAnCiAL RevieW
continued

investment company continued

149.4
£m

Capital gains

net interest income 

capital gains 

Capital gains in the period totalled £149.4m 
(2013: £73.0m) of which £122.1m were 
realised (2013: £14.1m), principally Allflex, 
and £27.3m unrealised (2013: £58.9m). 

There was a £32.9m increase to the portfolio 
by fair valuing equity and warrants. Of this, 
£27.3m (2013: £58.9m) is recognised as an 
income statement movement and £5.6m 
(2013: £59.7m) as a movement in reserves. 
A total of £18.7m (2013: £nil) of unrealised 
gains previously recognised in the income 
statement were realised in the year.

impairments 

Net impairments for the period were £95.1m 
(2013: £80.0m), which excludes a provision 
of £17.3m taken on a restructured asset. 
The write off of the debt instrument resulted 
in a corresponding uplift to the equity 
instrument reported through unrealised 
capital gains. Gross impairments amounted 
to £133.6m (2013: £141.1m), of which 
£106.1m is in relation to three French assets 
and one Italian asset. There were recoveries 
of £21.2m (2013: £61.1m) in the period, 
principally due to one asset. 

Net interest income of £133.8m 
(2013: £159.7m) comprises interest income 
of £178.8m (2013: £214.7m), less interest 
expense of £45.0m (2013: £55.0m). 
Interest income was below the prior year 
due to a decrease in the average IC portfolio. 
Cash interest income represents 31% 
(2013: 34%) of the total. The Group utilised 
the cash generated from the realisations to 
reduce its borrowings leading to a reduction 
in interest expense.

dividend income 

Two equity investments made one-off 
distributions following a refinancing of their 
debt during the year. This led to an increase 
in dividend income from £2.4m to £19.7m. 

operating expenses 

Operating expenses of the IC amount to 
£36.6m (2013: £25.3m), of which incentive 
scheme costs of £22.6m (2013: £18.1m) 
are the largest component. Other staff and 
administrative costs were £14.0m compared 
to £7.2m last year, a £6.8m increase. Of this, 
£2.6m relates to the cost of business 
development, primarily the establishment 
of a US credit team and our Japanese 
operations, and £1.6m of one off 
employee costs. 

The management fee on IC investments 
managed by the FMC reduced to £20.7m 
(2013: £23.3m) as a result of the reduction in 
the average size of the loan book.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014group

568
£m

Total cash generated from 
operating activities

Overall, our strong 
balance sheet leaves us 
well positioned to invest 
in growing our asset 
under management 
capabilities.

year iN  
revieW

cashFloW and debt position 

Financial outlook 

Operating cash inflow for the year was £568.0m 
(2013: £84.4m outflow). The increase in the 
cash inflows is largely as a result of increased 
repayment activity compared to the prior 
year, as analysed below. 

Total cash receipts were £973.9m higher 
than last year. This is driven by increased 
repayment activity which has resulted in 
the repayment of rolled up interest and 
the receipt of dividends from two portfolio 
companies which have refinanced. 

Interest paid was 36% lower, in line with 
lower average borrowings. Included in 
operating expenses in the prior period were 
the final payments of £39.0m in respect of 
legacy incentive schemes. 

The cash generated from operating activities 
in the period was used to pay down debt. 
Total debt was £587m (2013: £1,155m). 
Total debt to shareholders’ funds as at 
31 March 2014 decreased to 39% from  
74% at 31 March 2013, as a result of the 
cash generated in the period. 

capital position 

Shareholders’ funds decreased by 4% to 
£1,508.1m (2013: £1,563.2m) in the year,  
due to £78.2m dividend payment in the 
period. The capital gain on Allflex was 
recycled from AFS reserves to the income 
statement on realisation and consequently 
has had minimal impact on shareholders’ 
funds in the period. 

We have a strong pipeline of products and 
therefore expect our fundraising momentum 
to continue. During the next 12 months we 
anticipate closes on our US debt and Asia 
Pacific mezzanine funds, further European 
and US CLOs and new product launches, 
including an alternative credit fund. This is 
expected to result in an increase in third 
party AUM. The quality of the Group’s 
fee base will be further enhanced by this 
fundraising and by investing the funds raised 
during the last financial year.

We do not expect to see the FMC operating 
margins benefit from the increased fee income 
during the current year as this is offset by the 
annualisation of the investment made during 
the last 12 months. Operating leverage of  
the business is likely to improve once the 
Group has invested, and therefore earning 
fees, on the funds raised.

The level of provisions should reduce 
with a reduction in the number of 
underperforming assets.

Overall, our strong balance sheet leaves 
us well positioned to invest in growing our 
fund management capabilities. We also 
expect the loan book to stabilise with a 
steady rate of realisations and continuing our 
investment pace. 

Cash in from realisations and dividends

Cash in from fees and cash pay interest

Total cash receipts

Cash interest paid

Cash paid to purchase loans and investments

Cash movement in assets held in warehouse or for syndication

Operating expenses paid

Total cash paid

Total cash generated from operating activities

2014  
£m

934.6

357.4

1,292.0

(37.8)

(512.1)

(81.4)

(92.7)

(724.0)

568.0

2013
£m

148.2

169.9

318.1

(59.0)

(260.6)

18.7

(101.6)

(402.5)

(84.4)

26 / 27

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplacerisksperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsmAnAging RiSK to 
deLiveR ouR StRAtegy

effective risk management is critical to enable us to deliver 
our strategic priorities. 

our approach

Risk management is the responsibility of 
the Board and is integral to the ability of the 
Group to deliver on its strategic priorities. 
The Board establishes the culture of effective 
risk management throughout the business 
by identifying and monitoring the material 
risks, setting risk appetite, and determining 
the risk tolerances of the Group. 

The Board is responsible for establishing 
and maintaining appropriate systems and 
controls to manage risk within the Group 
and to ensure compliance with regulation. 

The Group’s risk management systems are 
regularly monitored by the Risk Committee 
under delegation from the Board. The Risk 
Committee is responsible for overseeing 
the effectiveness of the internal control 
environment of the Group. Details of the 
activities of the Risk Committee in this 
financial year can be found in the Risk 
Committee report on page 60.

identiFying and monitoring  
material risks

Material risks are identified through a 
detailed analysis of individual processes 
and procedures (bottom up approach) 
and a consideration of the strategy and 
operating environment of the Group (top 
down approach).

The bottom up review encompasses the 
identification, management and monitoring 
of risks in each area of the business and 
ensures risk management controls are 
embedded in the business’ operations. 
The Risk Committee monitors these 
processes, reviewing the Risk Register 
and reporting material risks to the Board. 
In identifying risks, consideration is also 
given to risks identified by other asset 
managers in the sector and regulatory 
expectations. The materiality and severity of 
each risk is assessed through a combination 
of each risk’s likelihood of an adverse 
outcome and its impact. In assessing 
impact, consideration is given to financial, 
reputational and regulatory factors, the 
impact on management resources and risk 
mitigation plans established. 

The top down review, led by the Risk 
Committee, evaluates the material risks of 
the Group with reference to its strategy and 
the operating environment.

The Group considers its material risks are 
as follows:

business risk  
(including credit risk)

The risk of loss resulting from the failure  
to meet the business’s strategic priorities.

macroeconomic risk 

The financial risk of loss arising as a result  
of economic uncertainty, macroeconomic  
or political factors. 

liquidity risk

The risk of loss resulting from an inability  
to meet financial commitments as they 
fall due.

operational risk

The risk of loss resulting from inadequate 
or failed internal processes, people and 
systems, or from external events.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

risks

bOarD

Overall responsibility for  
risk management,  
systems and controls

Sets strategic  
objectives

Defines risk  
appetite

Monitors  
risk via KRIs

Executive  
and business unit  
management

Investment Committees, 
Treasury Committee 
and Compliance

Internal audit  
function to be established 
in FY15

business 

group support

28 / 29

n
W
o
d
p
o
t

s
s
e
c
o
r
p
w
e
i
v
e
R

p
u
m
o
t
t
o
b

s
s
e
c
o
r
p
w
e
i
v
e
R

strategic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationships 
 
 
 
 
Funds and portFolio

mACRoeConomiC RiSKS

our diversified balance sheet portfolio of assets enables 
us to mitigate the impact of any sector or country 
specific macroeconomic risk. The diversification of  
the investment Company portfolio outlined on these 
pages excludes the investment in funds which are 
themselves diversified.

31.5%

Uk

7.1%

spaiN

28.4%

fraNce

4.0%

beNelUx

6.4%

gerMaNy

8.0%

NOrth  
aMerica

3.7%

italy

0.1%

Other 
eUrOpe

4.9%

aUstralia

portFolio by sector 

sector 

%

Financial services
Business services
Construction materials
Telecoms, media and technology
Retail
Entertainment and leisure
Healthcare
Food and consumer products
Utilities and waste management
Transport
Real estate
Automotive
Manufacturing and engineering
Pharmaceuticals and chemicals
Packaging
Portfolio
Publishing and advertising

12.0%

10.7%

7.4%

6.9%

5.3%

5.2%

5.0%

4.3%

4.3%

3.4%

2.7%

2.5%

2.3%

2.2%

1.7%

1.2%

5.3%

NOrDic

0.1%
asia

0.5%

NeW  
zealaND

22.9%

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014risks

top 20 assets

company

sector

1

2

Applus+

Gerflor

3 Materis

4

5

SAG

Feu Vert

6 N&W Global Vending 

7

Fort Dearborn

8 Nocibé

9

Eurocater

10 AAS Link

11 Fraikin

12

13

Inspecta

Intelsat

14 Flaktwoods

15 Casa Reha

16 Motip Dupli

17 AVR

18 Mennisez

19 Tractel

20 Courtepaille

Business services 

Construction materials 

Construction materials 

Utilities 

Automotive 

Retail 

Packaging 

Retail 

Retail 

Financial services 

Transport 

Business services 

Telecoms, media and technology 

Telecoms, media and technology 

Healthcare 

Pharmaceuticals and chemicals 

Waste management

Food and consumer products 

Manufacturing and engineering 

Retail 

*Total carrying value on ICG balance sheet at 31 March 2014. Includes equity stake listed below where relevant.

year

2007

2011

2006

2008

2007

2008

2010

2006

2013

2007

2007

2007

2008

2007

2008

2006

2006/7

2006

2007

2011

country

Spain

France

France

Germany

France

Italy

US

France

Denmark

Australia

France

Finland

US

France

Germany

Netherlands

Netherlands

France

France

France

top 10 equity assets

top 10 interest bearing assets

company

sector

£m*

company

sector

1

2

3

4

5

Gerflor

Applus+

AAS Link

Intelsat

AVR

6 Mennisez

7 Minimax

Parkeon

8

9

Construction materials

Business services

Financial services

Telecoms, media and technology

Waste management

Food and consumer products

Electronics

Business services

71.6

40.6

33.9

31.6

27.4

26.2

24.9

16.5

16.4

14.1

1

Applus+

2 Materis

3

SAG

Business services

Construction materials

Utilities

4 N&W Global Vending 

Retail

5

6

7

Feu Vert

Fort Dearborn

Inspecta

8 Nocibe

9

Fraikin

Automotive

Packaging

Business services

Retail

Transport

10 Flaktwoods

Telecoms, media and technology

Bureau Van Dijk

Publishing and advertising

10 Ethypharm

Pharmaceuticals

*Carrying value on ICG balance sheet at 31 March 2014, included in the top 20 where relevant.

£m*

114.7

92.4

61.0

49.8

43.6

43.0

40.4

40.2

33.9

33.9

33.8

33.6

31.6

30.6

28.9

28.9

27.4

26.2

25.4

25.1

£m*

 74.1 

 61.0 

 48.5 

 43.0 

 39.2 

 35.2 

 33.6 

 32.3 

 27.0 

 25.4 

30 / 31

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationshipsouR 
APPetite  
foR RiSK

setting risk appetite and tolerances

The Board acknowledges and recognises that in the normal course of business the Group 
is exposed to risk and that it is willing to accept a level of risk in managing the business to 
achieve its strategic priorities. As part of its risk management processes, the Board considers 
its risk appetite in terms of the tolerance it is willing to accept in relation to each material risk 
based on key risk indicators.

The material risks and key risk indicators (including tolerance levels at which management 
would take action) are as follows: 

1GROW  

ASSETS UNDER 
MANAGEMENT

headline risk: business

material risks

key risk indicators

Failure to raise new third party funds 

New third party funds raised in a 12 month 
period is more than 50% below the prior year

3MANAGE  

PORTFOLIOS  
TO MAXIMISE  
VALUE

2INVEST 

SELECTIVELY

Failure to deploy committed capital 

On any fund, a request for an extension of the 
investment period

Failure to maintain acceptable relative investment 
performance across the majority of funds

Less than 50% of portfolio companies in direct 
investment funds perform above the prior year

Failure to execute the business strategy due to 
uncontrolled growth

The number of active initiatives that require 
additional resources or represent a substantial 
drain on existing resources

headline risk: macroeconomic 

material risks

key risk indicators

Loss as a result of a macroeconomic  
downturn or economic uncertainty 

Deterioration in any one or more of a wide range 
of economic indicators

headline risk: liquidity

material risks

key risk indicators

Failure to refinance debt as it falls due 

30% of total debt falling due within 18 months 

Failure of ICG to meet its debt covenants

Forecast covenant breach

headline risk: operational

material risks

key risk indicators

Unplanned loss of one or more key employees 

A breach of any ‘Key Man’ clause or the 
unplanned departure of key employees

Reputational damage due to a regulatory  
failing by a regulated jurisdiction

Any reportable breach

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
risks

PRinCiPAL RiSKS  
And unCeRtAintieS

external risks

risk 

impact 

mitigation and movement in the year

macroeconomic risk

Failure to execute the  
Group’s strategic  
priorities due to unforeseen  
macroeconomic  
changes

liquidity risk

Failure to refinance debt  
as it falls due

Adverse macroeconomic conditions 
could reduce the opportunity to deploy capital 
and impair the ability of the Group to manage 
effectively its portfolios, reducing the value of 
future management fees, investment income, 
performance fees and carry.

An ongoing failure to refinance its liabilities 
could result in the Group failing to meet  
its payment obligations as they fall due.  
As a result the Group would not be a 
going concern.

operational risk 

Reputational damage  
due to a regulatory failing

The Group’s ability to raise new funds 
and operate its fund management 
business would be impaired as a result 
of a regulatory failing.

,

The Board regularly receives detailed market reports, 
reviewing the latest developments in the Group’s 
key markets. The Investment Committees receive 
ongoing detailed and specific market reviews for 
each investment. 

During the year economic indicators in the Group’s 
key markets have shown improvement.

,

The Group has a policy which seeks to ensure that 
debt funding is obtained from diversified sources and 
that the repayment profile is managed to minimise 
material repayment events. 

During the year the Group has continued to extend 
and diversify its sources of funding.

,

The Group has a governance structure in place, 
supported by a risk framework that allows for the 
identification, control, and mitigation of material 
risks resulting from the geographical and product 
diversity of the Group. The adequacy of the 
systems and controls the Group has in place to 
comply with the regulations, safeguard the Group 
from the threat of cybercrime and to mitigate the 
risks that these represent is periodically assessed. 
This includes a tailored compliance monitoring 
programme that specifically addresses regulatory 
and reputational risks.

The increased breadth of the marketing activities, 
the expansion of the Group’s product portfolio, and 
increasing product complexity has led to increased 
regulatory risk.

32 / 33

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationships 
PRinCiPAL RiSKS And unCeRtAintieS
continued

internal risks

risk 

impact 

mitigation and movement in the year

business risk

Failure to raise third 
party funds

A failure to raise new funds would reduce 
the Group’s long term income from fund 
management fees, performance fees  
and carried interest. 

business risk 

Failure to deploy 
capital committed

Failure to deploy capital reduces the value of 
future management fees, investment income, 
performance fees and carried interest.

business risk

Failure to maintain acceptable 
relative investment 
performance across the 
majority of funds

Failure to maintain adequate performance in 
the open ended funds may result in investors 
reducing or cancelling their commitments, 
reducing AUM and fund management fees.

,

The Group has built dedicated fundraising and 
scaleable infrastructure teams to grow and diversify 
its institutional client base by geography and type.

The Group has expanded its product portfolio 
to address a range of investor requirements and 
continues to build a strong product pipeline.

A record level of fundraising was achieved during the 
year across a range of products.

,

The rate of investment is kept under continued 
review by the Investment Committees and senior 
management to ensure acceptable levels are 
maintained in current market conditions. 

In an increasingly competitive landscape the Group has 
continued to deploy funds in line with the expected run 
rate during the year.

,

ICG has a disciplined investment policy and all 
investments are selected and regularly monitored 
by the Group’s Investment Committees. 
Disciplined credit procedures are applied both before 
and during the period of investment. ICG limits the 
extent of credit risk by diversifying its portfolio assets 
by sector, size and geography.

Continued focus by senior management and 
executives ensures maximum recovery is achieved. 

During the year the Group has maintained its 
investment performance.

,

business risk

Failure to execute the business 
strategy due to 
uncontrolled growth

Failure to grow in a controlled way may result 
in losses, failings or reputational damage as a 
result of risks in relation to products or regulations 
we do not fully understand or the acquisition 
or development of products for which we 
have inadequate resources to fully implement 
and support.

The Group has a structured framework that 
considers and assesses the commercial benefits, 
risks and resource needs of all new initiatives. 
Significant initiatives are subject to Board approval 
and all new initiatives are overseen by the 
Executive Committee.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
  
risks

risk 

impact 

mitigation and movement in the year

liquidity risk 

Failure of ICG to meet its 
debt covenants

operational risk 

Unplanned loss of one  
or more key employees

In the event that the Group breached its 
covenants, the lenders could potentially  
call on their commitments. 

The Group continually monitors forecast covenant 
levels. The Board reviews the forecast and actual 
position on a regular basis.

,

Breach of any ‘Key Man’ clause or unexpected 
loss of one or more key employees could result in 
the Group having to stop making investments for 
the relevant fund or may impair the ability of the 
Group to raise new funds.

During the year the Group has not identified any 
forecasted covenant breach.

,

The Group rewards its investment professionals and 
other key employees in line with market practice. 
Senior investment professionals receive long term 
incentives and carried interest as part of their 
remuneration. The Group periodically engages 
external consultants to benchmark the rewards 
offered by the Group to ensure they remain attractive 
and competitive.

The Group has an appraisal and development process 
for all its employees to ensure that individuals remain 
sufficiently motivated and appropriately competent  
to ensure the ongoing operation and development  
of the business.

During the year the Group’s performance has not been 
impacted by the loss of any employee.

34 / 35

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewperformance  and prioritiesresources andrelationships 
 
ouR ReSouRCeS 
And ReLAtionSHiPS

our business model can only function because it is supported 
by several critical resources and relationships.

our resources and relationships

Our people are our key resource and 
instrumental in the delivery of our strategic 
objectives. It is through our people that over 
the last 25 years we have generated a brand 
and track record making us a well known 
and highly respected fund manager in our 
core markets. Evidence of the quality of our 
business has been recognised as we have 
received six awards during the last year.

The contribution of our people to the value of 
our business is demonstrated through our:

 – Investment management skills

 – Distribution capabilities

 – Scalable infrastructure

our people manage the investment 
process

The Group has a consistent investment 
culture across its products. We deliver a 
disciplined investment process, demonstrate 
core credit principles and are focused 
on capital preservation. Our rigorous 
risk analysis and engagement with our 
portfolio management processes continue 
throughout the life of the investment, 
encompassing regular reviews, active 
management of the investment and a 
proactive approach to realisation.

Our investment professionals are specialists, 
with the skills required to understand and 
assess the relevant risks and opportunities 
for their product, to originate investments and 

then manage those assets to realise returns 
for investors. Successful application of those 
skills has supported the development of our 
longstanding track record.

We value the local knowledge of our 
investment professionals. We believe that 
this is crucial to maintain a strong flow of 
investment opportunities and to effectively 
manage our investments. Our teams 
speak the local languages, understand 
local laws and customs and have the 
necessary depth of relationships required 
to operate successfully.

our people distribute our products

Our dedicated distribution team 
is embedded within the business. 
Our relationships with third party fund 
investors have strengthened since the 
team was established in 2011. The team 
has increased investor awareness of our 
products, expanding our fund investor 
network both geographically and by investor 
type. This enhanced network promotes 
continuous engagement and supports the 
development of investment products which 
provide solutions to investors.

Our distribution team have replicated the 
local model established by the investment 
business. Their local market knowledge, 
supported with an understanding of what 
the Group can offer, are giving us access to 
new investors.

our people manage our scalable 
inFrastructure 

Our infrastructure teams support the whole 
business, ensuring consistency and quality 
of service to our counterparties and fund 
investors. They have established, manage 
and continue to develop systems and 
controls to support our investment activities 
and effectively report on the performance 
and activities of the Group and our funds. 

Our employees have the market skills, 
knowledge and relationships to support 
the business as we progress our strategic 
priorities, expanding both our product range 
and our geographical coverage.

our people manage our key 
relationships 

Building and maintaining our key 
relationships is essential to both support 
the growth of the business and deliver our 
strategic objectives.

1   grow assets under management

The Group is expanding and 
strengthening its relationships with 
third party investors. Our products offer 
investors an opportunity to diversify their 
portfolio and generate yield. We are 
continuously engaged with our investors 
to understand their current and future 
needs and to ensure that we have the 
products to meet these requirements. 

The availability of balance sheet capital 
to co-invest and to support product 
development is underpinned by our 
relationships with our key finance 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014resOUrces aND 
relatiONships

counterparties. These include banks, 
bondholders, other lenders and 
rating agencies.

performing well above financial services 
norms. It also demonstrated clear progress 
on the initiatives identified in the prior survey. 

Our active compliance team works 
with the business and our regulators 
to both identify and manage regulatory 
risk and also to promote best practice 
within the marketing, investment and 
infrastructure teams. The profile of this 
area is increasing as we expand our 
product range.

2   invest selectively 

Our investment professionals manage 
the relationships necessary to originate 
and source investment opportunities 
for our funds. These relationships 
include financial advisers, banks 
and other investment managers. 
Our reputation, built up over 25 years, 
has generated strong, supportive, asset 
sourcing networks.

3   manage portfolios to maximise value 
We invest money across the capital 
structure of companies and property 
assets. We seek to develop strong 
relationships both with owners and the 
management teams. Our investment 
teams have local market knowledge 
and access to the Group’s extensive 
sector and market experience to support 
those businesses. Attendance at 
board meetings of originated corporate 
investments both increases our 
knowledge of the business and 
allows our investment professionals 
to develop strong relationships with 
management teams.

our responsibility to our people

To successfully deliver our strategic priorities 
the Group is focused on engaging with 
and motivating its employees. The current 
engagement of our people is demonstrated 
by our staff retention rate of 90.5%.

Effective two way communication with our 
people is essential to build and maintain 
engagement. We have a number of formal 
and informal channels to achieve this. 
These include monthly whole business 
briefings, an intranet and regular team and 
manager meetings. 

The Group conducts regular, confidential, 
employee surveys to identify the areas of the 
business in need of further development, 
and those areas that are performing well. 
The last survey was conducted in 2012 
and demonstrated that the Group was 

The Group considers that training and 
development are essential to attract and 
retain people of the highest calibre and has 
always invested significantly in this. We are 
committing to enhancing the knowledge and 
skills of our people and nurturing their talent. 
We run an extensive programme of internal 
and external training to develop and enhance 
core skills, increase technical competency 
and to develop future leaders. 

The ongoing development of our people is 
supported by our performance management 
system. This provides a regular forum 
for employees and managers to review 
performance against agreed objectives and 
to identify areas for further development.

Our people are offered access to a range 
of benefits designed to attract, develop and 
retain talented employees. We ensure our 
levels of overall remuneration are market 
competitive. Benefits include: pension 
savings, healthcare and health screening, 
life assurance, child care vouchers, travel 
insurance, share save scheme, gym 
membership and cycle to work schemes.

The Group supports flexible working, with 
5.2% of employees benefitting from these 
arrangements. Our employee initiated 
turnover is 7.5%.

diversity and values

The permanent employee population of 189 
represents 24 different nationalities. Of our 
permanent employees 66 are women and 
123 men. We do not record the religion 
or ethnicity of employees. The senior 
management team (excluding the Group’s 
Board) comprises two women and four men 
and ICG’s Board comprises eight individuals 
of which one is a woman. 

We are committed to providing a safe and 
healthy work environment for our people 
where diversity is valued, where everyone is 
treated fairly and with dignity and respect, 
regardless of age, gender, race, sexual 
orientation, disability, religion or beliefs. 
We do not tolerate discrimination of any 
nature and comply fully with appropriate 
human rights legislation. We aim for 
employees to have a sense of wellbeing 
and we promote a working culture where 
employees can freely question practices 
and suggest alternatives. 

36 / 37

Top: Harpley tower Hamlets Pupil Referral 
unit pupils attend a ThinkForward workshop  
at the group’s London office

Bottom: Pupils from oaklands School, bethnal 
green being escorted around the Aldgate tower 
development in the City of London by iCg volunteers

500
£k

5 year commitment from  
ICG to Impetus – PEF  
ThinkForward programme

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportstrategybusiness modelmarketplaceyear in reviewrisksperformance  and prioritiesouR ReSouRCeS 
And ReLAtionSHiPS
continued

our responsibility to 
our community

Our social and community policies and 
practices are grounded in promoting 
opportunities to young people, through 
education or work experience. In practice 
this means making a contribution through 
creating work experience opportunities 
across the Group and supporting a charity 
(ThinkForward) which helps young people 
make the often difficult transition from 
education to the workplace. In addition, 
employees are encouraged to donate time to 
activities supporting ThinkForward or have the 
opportunity to receive matched contributions 
for their fundraising efforts for other charities. 

The Group runs an internship programme 
which offers a number of placements for young 
graduates who have achieved academically 
but are not readily able to access opportunities 
in the financial sector. The fully funded 
internship offers the opportunity to rotate 
through ICG’s key business areas, building 
a strong understanding of our business 
model with the opportunities to specialise in 
a specific role. The internship programme is 
expected to provide that difficult first step on 
the career ladder. The programme is now in 
its second year, 100% of its first cohort having 
successfully secured a permanent job in their 
chosen field.

The Group has made a five year, £500k 
commitment to Impetus-PEF’s ThinkForward 
programme. ThinkForward was set up by 
the Private Equity Foundation (now merged 
with Impetus to form Impetus-PEF) in 2010 
to dramatically reduce the risk of young 
people becoming NEETs (not in education, 
employment or training). According to 
Impetus-PEF, 15% of young people are failing 
to make a successful move from education 
into employment. The charity places 

dedicated coaches in schools where there 
are young people who have been identified 
as ‘at risk’ of becoming NEETs. The coaches 
work with individuals to help them achieve 
their goals, providing support both at school 
and at home. 

The Group’s commitment has provided 
funding to support a full time coach for the 
Harpley Tower Hamlets Pupil Referral Unit. 
The coach works with young people to 
support them to maximise their opportunities 
while in full time education and to improve 
their chances of a successful transition 
into long term employment. ICG is the first 
company to make such a commitment to 
a Pupil Referral Unit and is very proud of 
its association.

For more information about Impetus-PEF 
please visit: http://impetus-pef.org.uk

For more information about ThinkForward 
please visit: http://think-forward.org.uk

For more information about Tower 
Hamlets Pupil Referral Unit please visit: 
www.towerhamletspru.org.uk

our responsibility to our 
environment

ICG recognises that businesses have a 
responsibility to protect the environment and 
understand the impact their operations have, 
and we take appropriate measures to limit 
our energy use and carbon output. 

The Group is required to state the annual 
quantity of emissions in tonnes of carbon 
dioxide equivalent from activities for which the 
Group is responsible. The Group’s carbon 
emissions result predominantly from business 
travel. Using Defra/DECC’s GHG conversion 
factors for company reporting, emissions for 
the year to 31 March 2014 were 4,438 tonnes 
of CO2.

Operational scope

Greenhouse gas emission source

2014

Units

Direct emissions 
(Scope 1)

Indirect emissions 
(Scope 2)

Indirect emissions 
(Scope 3)

total

Emissions per FTE

On-site air conditioning refrigerant loss

14

Tonnes CO2e

Purchased electricity/heat

 870 

Tonnes CO2e

Business travel: flights and rail

 3,554 

 4,438 

Tonnes CO2e

Tonnes CO2e

 20.6  Tonnes CO2e per FTE

We have reported on all of the emission sources required under the Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic report and Directors’ report) Regulations 2013. These sources fall within our 
consolidated financial statements. We do not have responsibility for any emission sources that 
are not included in our consolidated financial statements.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

our strategy in action

over the next few pages, we demonstrate our 
strategy in action, highlighting the different 
ways in which we are growing our assets 
under management – growth which will 
mean we begin our 25th year in great shape.

We are maximising our existing product 
portfolio, having issued three new european 
CLos during the year.

We are offering our products in new 
geographies, expanding into the uS, 
the world’s largest debt market.

And we are building on our global success 
with new products – recently closing a new 
€1.7bn Senior debt Partners product which 
offers investors access to the european senior 
secured loan market.

38 / 39

strategic report 
MaxiMisiNg 
 the existiNg...

then…

ICG issued its first European CLO 
in September 1999 at €417m, 
making it the first vehicle of its 
kind in the European loan market.

1999

case studyGrowing assets under managementi

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

... prODUct 
pOrtfOliO

noW…

15 years later ICG is still a market leader in this product category, 
issuing three new European CLOs during the course of the financial 
year raising a total of €1.3bn, with St Pauls III being the largest 
European CLO of the year at €550m. This represents 14% of 
the total market, which issued €9.6bn in the same period.

New regulations require ICG to use its capital to invest at least 5% 
in each vehicle. This makes the availability of the balance sheet 
resources a key competitive advantage. The three new European 
CLOs have also given the Group the opportunity to recycle assets 
from older CLOs which are coming towards the end of their life, 
thereby extending an existing fee stream. This is in addition to 
adding new assets and fee streams.

EUROPEAN CLOs

ST PAULS II

ST PAULS III

ST PAULS IV

TOTAL RAISED

€1.3bn

2014

40 / 41

 
 
2000

OfferiNg OUr 
prODUcts...

then…

ICG launched in 1989 with the 
sole objective of becoming 
Europe’s leading independent 
specialist arranger and provider 
of mezzanine finance, the focus 
being on the UK and European 
markets. 

case studyGrowing assets under managementi

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

... iN NeW 

geOgraphies

noW…

25 years later ICG has expanded its debt and CLO products  
into the world’s largest debt market, by launching dedicated US 
products for the first time. After opening an office in New York  
in 2007, the Group used its balance sheet capital to invest in  
its first US asset in 2008. Since 2012, the New York team has been 
strengthened. The 17 investment professionals have over 150 years’ 
experience investing in the US market. Together, ICG’s experience 
of the products and the local market knowledge of the team have 
been the foundations to the Group’s US expansion, resulting in  
a $371m US CLO closing in March 2014 and marketing underway 
for a US debt fund.

– FUnd V – mEzzanInE FUnd

– LOnGBOw III – prOpErtY dEBt FUnd 

–  LOnGBOw SEnIOr SECUrEd UK prOpErtY 

dEBt InVEStmEnt – LIStEd VEHICLE

– St paULS CLOS II, III, IV

–  tOtaL CrEdIt – mULtI StratEGY 

CrEdIt FUnd

– US FUnd I 

– ICG US CLO 2014-1

– EUrOpEan LOan FUnd

– HIGH YIELd BOnd FUnd

2014

–  ICap II – aSIa paCIFIC 

mEzzanInE FUnd

–  aUStraLIan  

SEnIOr LOanS

42 / 43

 
 
bUilDiNg ON 
OUr glObal 
sUccess...

then…

ICG began in 1989 with a single 
product – mezzanine finance. In 
its first year it invested £60m in 10 
deals. It was not until 2000 that 
its first third party European 
mezzanine fund was raised. In 
total, 13 institutional investors 
committed €388m.

1989

case studyGrowing assets under managementi

s
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

i

F
n
a
n
c
a
l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

2014

noW…

25 years later ICG has closed a €1.7bn Senior Debt Partners 
product which has been established to provide investors with  
an opportunity to access the European senior secured loan 
market, a specialist private debt asset class. As a new product 
European Senior Debt Partners brings together the Group’s 
existing knowledge of the European senior debt market gained 
through its CLOs product and the origination skills of its local 
European teams, which are at the heart of the mezzanine 
product. At €1.7bn, the amount raised is 70% more than the 
targeted €1bn and over the original maximum size of €1.5bn. 

... With NeW 
prODUcts

senior debt partners

70%OVEr tarGEt

1.7

1.0

0

amOUnt 
raISEd

tarGEt

44 / 45

€

bn

 
 
ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014

Governance

Contents

GovernanCe 

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance 

Audit Committee report 

Risk Committee report 

Directors’ remuneration report 

Directors’ remuneration policy 

Annual report on remuneration 

Directors’ report 

Directors’ responsibilities 

Auditor’s report 

47

48

50

54

60

62

63

73

81

86

87

 
CHAIRMAN’S 
INTRODUCTION

JUstIn DoWLeY
Chairman

Our strong governance 
framework is integral 
to our business.

Dear shareholder

 – Conducting a Board evaluation – this 

Your Board is committed to maintaining 
high standards in the area of corporate 
governance. Throughout the year 
to 31 March 2014, the Group was in 
compliance with the provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’) 
issued by the Financial Reporting Council. 
A copy of the Code is publicly available on 
the Financial Reporting Council’s website 
www.frc.org.uk

The Board is responsible to the shareholders 
of the Company as a whole, and manages 
the Group for the benefit of those 
shareholders. To achieve this the Board 
must provide leadership of the Group within 
a framework of controls which enable 
risk to be assessed and managed, and 
which ensure that the necessary financial 
and human resources are in place for the 
Company to meet its objectives and thus 
increase shareholder value. In fulfilling these 
roles we aim to exercise correct supervision 
while fostering a corporate culture that 
permits growth and empowers the 
entrepreneurial spirit of our employees.

The Corporate Governance report on 
the following pages gives details on this 
important area. Some of the steps we took 
to fulfil this responsibility during the last 
financial year were:

 – Receiving detailed reports on new areas 
of business – the Board is keen to ensure 
that areas of significant expansion are 
monitored, and has received detailed 
presentations from a number of 
business unit heads about their strategy 
and operations

 – Overseeing geographical expansion 
– the Group has opened a new office 
in Tokyo and expanded its operations 
in a number of other jurisdictions, 
including the United States and Australia. 
This has required extensive awareness 
of and compliance with local legal and 
regulatory requirements

process, moderated by an external firm, 
generated 360 degree feedback for 
each Director and highlighted areas for 
the Board to focus on in future to ensure 
proper oversight of the Group

 – Splitting the Risk Committee from the 

Audit Committee – this separation, which 
took place in March 2013, has enabled 
the members of the Risk Committee to 
take a more focused look at some of 
the key risks facing our Group. This has 
been combined with the introduction of a 
rolling agenda for these committees (and 
the Remuneration Committee) to ensure 
that all relevant matters are reviewed on a 
regular basis

 – Continuing regular shareholder meetings – 
members of the Board have regularly met 
with a number of shareholders to deliver 
updates on the performance and strategy 
of the Group’s business and to allow 
shareholders to air any concerns

Three new Directors, including two new 
Non Executive Directors, joined the Board 
in the prior financial year, and so the year 
covered by this report has been their first 
full year on the Board. Each of them is a 
full contributor at Board meetings, and 
as they have gained experience in Board 
proceedings, our discussions have become 
ever more robust and detailed.

Our strong governance framework will 
remain integral to our business model during 
the coming financial year as we seek to 
grow our assets under management and 
deliver growth for our shareholders without 
compromising our risk management and 
internal controls. 

JUstIn DoWLeY 
Chairman 
23 May 2013

46 / 47

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportbOARD Of DIReCTORS

JUstIn DoWLeY

ChrIstophe evaIn

Benoît DUrteste

phILIp KeLLer

Chairman

Managing Director and CEO

Managing Director

Managing Director and CFO

Justin Dowley qualified as a 
Chartered Accountant with 
Price Waterhouse in 1980. 
From 1981 until 2011 his 
career was in investment 
banking: he was a founder 
partner of Tricorn Partners, 
Head of Investment Banking at 
Merrill Lynch Europe and a 
Director of Morgan Grenfell. 
He is a Non Executive Director 
of Melrose Industries PLC and 
the National Crime Agency 
and is also a Director of a 
number of private companies 
including Ascot Authority 
(Holdings) Limited.  

Christophe Evain has been 
CEO of ICG since 2010; he 
had worked at ICG for 
16 years prior to this and was 
responsible for opening ICG’s 
offices in Paris, Hong Kong 
and New York. Before ICG, 
he held a number of roles in 
leading financial institutions 
including Banque de Gestion 
Privée, National Westminster 
Bank and Crédit Lyonnais 
specialising in leverage and 
structured finance. 
Graduate of Dauphine  
University, Paris. 

Benoît Durteste is Head of 
European Mezzanine and a 
Fund Manager for ICG Recovery 
Fund 2008 and ICG Europe 
Fund V. He joined ICG in 
September 2002 from Swiss Re 
where he worked as a Managing 
Director in the Structured 
Finance division in London. 
Prior to Swiss Re, he worked in 
the Leveraged Finance division 
of BNP Paribas for six years and 
for GE Capital, notably as CFO 
of one of their portfolio 
companies. He is a graduate  
of the Ecole Supérieure de 
Commerce de Paris. 

Philip Keller has been CFO 
of ICG for eight years. Prior to 
ICG, he was Finance Director 
of ERM, a global environmental 
consultancy, where he was 
part of a management team 
that led two leveraged 
buyouts in 2001 and 2005. 
He previously held a number 
of financial directorships in 
the GlaxoSmithKline and 
Johnson & Johnson Groups. 
Chartered Accountant and 
graduate of Durham University. 

Chairs ICG’s Nominations 
Committee and is a member of the 
Remuneration Committee and the 
Risk Committee.

Chairman of the Executive 
Committee and Chief 
Investment Officer.

Member of the Executive 
Committee. Responsible for 
European mezzanine.

Member of the Executive 
Committee. Responsible for 
finance, human resources 
and operations.

Joined: 2006

Joined: 1994

Joined: 2002

Joined: 2006

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
peter GIBBs

LInDseY MCMUrraY

KevIn parrY

KIM WahL

Non Executive Director

Non Executive Director

Non Executive Director

Non Executive Director

Peter Gibbs was previously 
Chief Investment Officer of  
Merrill Lynch’s Investment 
Management activities outside 
the US and prior to this Co-Head 
of Equity Investments worldwide. 
He has wide experience in the 
asset management and 
investment management sectors 
and currently serves as a Non 
Executive Director of Resolution 
Group, UKFI, and Aspect Capital 
Limited and as a Director of 
Bank of America Merrill Lynch 
(UK) Pension Plan Trustees Ltd. 

Lindsey McMurray has been 
a private equity investor, 
specialising in financial 
services, for more than 18 years. 
Since 2007, Lindsey has led 
the team managing the £1.1bn 
RBS Special Opportunities 
Fund (SOF). Prior to this she 
was a partner at private equity 
firm Cabot Square Capital 
Ltd. She serves as a Non 
Executive Director on the 
Boards of a number of SOF 
portfolio companies including 
Shawbrook Bank, Banca 
Sistema and Moneycorp and 
is a trustee of the Future First 
charity. She is a graduate of 
Strathclyde University. 

Kevin Parry is a Non Executive 
Director of Daily Mail and 
General Trust plc. He was Chief 
Financial Officer at Schroders 
plc, the FTSE 100 asset 
management and private 
banking group, from January 
2009 until May 2013 and 
Chairman of their Audit 
Committee from 2003 to 2008. 
Previously Chief Executive at 
Management Consulting Group 
plc and a managing partner at 
KPMG, he is a Chartered 
Accountant with extensive 
experience of auditing and 
advising large international 
groups. He is Deputy Chairman 
of the Royal National Children’s 
Association and is a member of 
the Court of the Chartered 
Accountants livery company.

Kim Wahl is the owner and 
Chairman of the investment 
firm Stromstangen AS 
established in 2004. Kim was 
Deputy Chairman and 
co-founder of the European 
private equity firm IK Investment 
Partners from 1989 to 2009, 
and previously was a Corporate 
Finance Associate with 
Goldman, Sachs & Co. He is a 
board member of UPM-
Kymmene Oy and DNB Bank 
ASA and a Co-Founder and 
Chairman of the Voxtra 
Foundation.  

Chairs ICG’s Remuneration 
Committee and is a member 
of the Audit Committee, the Risk 
Committee and the Nominations 
Committee. 

Member of the Remuneration 
Committee, the Audit Committee, 
Risk Committee, and the 
Nominations Committee. 

Chairs ICG’s Audit Committee and 
Risk Committee, member of the 
Remuneration Committee and the 
Nominations Committee and Senior 
Independent Director. 

Member of the Remuneration 
Committee, the Audit Committee, 
the Risk Committee and the 
Nominations Committee.

Joined: 2010

Joined: 2012

Joined: 2009

Joined: 2012

48 / 49

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
CORpORATe GOveRNANCe

Thorough oversight by the Group’s Directors is at the core of our 
corporate governance philosophy

the roLes of the ChaIrMan 
anD ChIef exeCUtIve

The Chairman of the Board, Justin Dowley, 
leads the Board in the determination of its 
strategy and in achieving its objectives. 
The Chairman is responsible for organising 
the business of the Board, ensuring its 
effectiveness and setting its agenda, and is 
also responsible for effective communication 
with the Group’s shareholders. 
The Chairman was considered independent 
at the date of his appointment as Chairman.

The Chief Executive Officer, Christophe 
Evain, oversees the Group on a day to day 
basis and is accountable to the Board for 
the financial and operational performance of 
the Group. The Chief Executive is supported 
in his role by the Executive Committee, 
which comprises the Managing Directors 
and meets on a regular basis to consider 
operational matters and the implementation 
of the Group’s strategy. No one Managing 
Director is able to significantly affect the 
running of the Company without consulting 
his colleagues.

In accordance with the Code, the Board has 
adopted a formal division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman and the CEO, with 
the intention to establish a clear division of 
responsibilities between the running of the 
Board and the executive responsibility for the 
running of the Company’s business.

senIor InDepenDent DIreCtor

Kevin Parry holds the position of Senior 
Independent Director of the Company. 
In accordance with the Code, any 
shareholder concerns not resolved 
through the usual mechanisms for investor 
communication can be conveyed to the 
Senior Independent Director. 

the BoarD’s responsIBILItIes 
anD proCesses 

The principal matters considered by the 
Board during the year included:

 – The Group’s strategic plan, budget  

and financial resources

 – The Group’s performance and outlook

BoarD of DIreCtors

As at 31 March 2014, the Board comprised 
three Managing Directors, a Non Executive 
Chairman and four independent Non 
Executive Directors. Having duly considered 
their independence in accordance with the 
Code, the Board considers each of its Non 
Executive Directors to be independent in 
character and judgement and that they each 
provide effective challenge both within and 
outside Board meetings. The Non Executive 
Directors are considered to be of the 
appropriate calibre and experience to bring 
significant influence to bear on the Board’s 
decision making process.

The Chairman has acted as a Non Executive 
Director of Melrose Industries PLC and the 
National Crime Agency during the year. 
We do not consider these appointments 
to have any adverse impact on his ability to 
perform his role effectively as Chairman of 
the Board. 

The Board meets at least six times a 
year, with additional meetings being held 
as required.

 – Presentations on new products  
of the Group and the expansion  
to new jurisdictions

 – The capital structure of the Group

 – Opportunities for the Group to expand 

by acquisition and by launching 
new products

 – A review of compliance policies

 – A regular review of the investment portfolio

 – Communication of our financial results  

for the interim and year end

 – A review of current compensation structures

 – The independence of  

Non Executive Directors

 – A board performance evaluation

 – Succession planning for roles within the 

Group, both at Board level and in respect 
of other senior managers

 – Terms of reference for each of the 

Committees of the Board

 – Corporate Responsibility initiatives 

and performance

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014The following table shows the number of Board and Committee meetings held during the year and the attendance record of 
individual Directors.

BoarD anD CoMMIttee MeetInGs 

Number of meetings held

Justin Dowley

Christophe Evain

Philip Keller

Benoît Durteste

Peter Gibbs

Lindsey McMurray

Kevin Parry

Kim Wahl

Board

Audit
Committee

Risk
Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nominations
Committee

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

5

5

4*

3*

5*

4*

5

4

5

5

4

3

4*

4*

3*

4

3

4

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

N/A

1*

N/A

2

2

2

2

* Attended part or all of these meetings at the invitation of the relevant Chairman but was not a member of the relevant Committee.

At each Board meeting there is a full financial 
and business review which includes the 
comparison of performance to date against the 
Board’s previously approved annual budget.

Each Board member receives a 
comprehensive Board pack at least 
five days prior to each meeting which 
incorporates a formal agenda together with 
supporting papers for items to be discussed 
at the meeting. Further information is 
obtained by the Board from the Managing 
Directors and other relevant members 
of senior management, as the Board, 
particularly its Non Executive Directors, 
considers appropriate.

All Directors have access to the advice and 
services of the Company Secretary and may 
take independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense in the furtherance of 
their duties. The appointment or removal of 
the Company Secretary would be a matter 
for the Board.

The Board appreciates the importance of 
the continued professional development 
of the Directors. The focus in this area this 
year has been on informing the Board 
about areas of expansion for the Group, 
and consequently the Board has received 
detailed presentations from a number of 
business heads about their plans. 

The Non Executive Directors, at least 
annually, hold meetings in the absence of 
the Managing Directors and, separately, in 
the absence of the Chairman. Each Non 
Executive Director has an appointment letter 
with the Company and their appointments 
are reviewed periodically.

BoarD perforManCe

In line with the effective governance 
requirements of the Code, the Board 
reviews its own performance annually. 
The assessment covers the functioning of 
the Board as a whole, the functioning of 
the Executive Committee, the evaluation of 
individual Directors and includes a review of 
the effectiveness of the Board Committees. 
The Non Executive Directors, led by the 
Senior Independent Director, and taking into 
account the views of Executive Directors, are 
responsible for evaluating the performance 
of the Chairman. The Board considers the 
results of the performance evaluation when 
making its recommendations regarding the 
re-election of Directors. This exercise was 
carried out in May 2014 and the feedback 
obtained was collated and presented 
to the Board for a detailed discussion. 
The evaluation did not identify any significant 
areas for concern and the Board is satisfied 
with its performance and that of its members, 
and also the performance of its Committees. 
Certain points raised during this exercise will 
be addressed at Board meetings during the 
forthcoming financial year.

In 2013, the Board also employed the 
services of an external independent third 
party for these purposes. This considered the 
effectiveness and performance of the Board 
in relation to: Board composition, expertise 
and dynamics; time management and Board 
support; strategic oversight; risk management 
and internal control; and succession planning 
and human resource management. The 
independent Board evaluation concluded 
that the Board was effective in all areas.

eLeCtIon anD re-eLeCtIon 
of DIreCtors

The Company’s current Articles of 
Association provide that a Director appointed 
by the Board shall retire at the Annual 
General Meeting following his appointment 
and that at each Annual General Meeting of 
the Company one third of the Directors must 
retire by rotation. The Board has decided that 
in accordance with the Code, each of the 
Directors will retire and stand for re-election 
at each year’s Annual General Meeting.

In relation to the Directors who are standing 
for re-election, the Chairman is satisfied that, 
following formal performance evaluation, 
each of the other Directors continues to be 
effective and demonstrates commitment to 
their role. In the case of the Chairman, the 
Non Executive Directors are satisfied that he 
continues to be effective and demonstrates 
commitment to his role.

ConfLICts of Interest

Directors have a statutory duty to avoid 
conflicts of interest with the Company. 
The Company’s Articles of Association 
allow the Directors to authorise conflicts of 
interest and the Board has adopted a policy 
and effective procedures for managing 
and, where appropriate, approving potential 
conflicts of interest.

50 / 51

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportCORpORATe GOveRNANCe
continued

Our Committees 
supplement Board 
proceedings and allow 
for more detailed 
scrutiny of key issues.

BoarD CoMMIttees

The Board is supported in its decisions by 
five principal Committees. The reports of 
the Audit Committee, the Risk Committee 
and the Remuneration Committee can be 
found at pages 54, 60 and 62 respectively, 
while details of the other two Committees 
are below.

The Terms of Reference of each of the 
Board Committees, together with the 
Directors’ service agreements, the terms and 
conditions of appointment of Non Executive 
Directors and Directors’ deeds of indemnity, 
are available for inspection at the Company’s 
registered office during normal business 
hours. Each Committee has access to 
such external advice as it may consider 
appropriate. The Company Secretary acts 
as Secretary of the Nominations Committee; 
the Group’s Head of Human Resources 
acts as Secretary to the Remuneration 
Committee; the Group’s Financial Controller 
acts as Secretary to the Audit Committee; 
and the Group’s Compliance Officer acts 
as Secretary to the Risk Committee. 
Each Committee’s Secretary serves at the 
invitation of the Chairman of that Committee.

The Terms of Reference of each Committee 
are considered regularly by the respective 
Committee and referred to the Board 
for approval.

noMInatIons CoMMIttee 

The Nominations Committee consists of five 
Non Executive Directors, these being Justin 
Dowley (Chairman of the Committee), Kevin 
Parry, Peter Gibbs, Lindsey McMurray and 
Kim Wahl. 

The Committee is responsible for 
considering the composition of the 
Board to ensure that the balance of its 
membership between Managing Directors 
and Non Executive Directors is appropriate. 
Appointments of Managing Directors and 
Non Executive Directors are made as 
necessary as a result of discussions by the 
Committee and are subject to full Board 
approval and election or re-election at a 
general meeting of the shareholders.

Prior to any appointment to the Board, the 
Nominations Committee considers the 
balance of skills, experience, independence 
and knowledge appropriate to determine 
the requirements and necessary capabilities 
of the role. In addition, any new Director 
normally meets all existing Directors prior 
to appointment.

In July 2013, the Committee reviewed and 
updated their policy on the background 
and diversity of Board members. The policy 
provides that, prior to any appointment to 
the Board, the Nominations Committee 
considers the balance of skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge appropriate to 
determine the requirements and necessary 
capabilities of the role. In considering 
candidates, appointments should be made 
relative to a number of different criteria, 
including diversity of gender, background 
and personal attributes, alongside the 
appropriate skill set, experience and 
expertise, and the Committee will seek 
to ensure that long lists and short lists of 
possible appointments to the Board reflect 
that position. The Committee will always 
seek to appoint the candidate with the most 
appropriate skills and experience regardless 
of their background, gender, race, marital 
status, age, disability, religious belief or 
sexual orientation. The Committee and the 
Board are committed to diversity both at 
Board level and throughout the organisation. 

The Committee is aware of the 
recommendations of the Davis Report on 
gender diversity at Board level. While it 
remains supportive of increased gender 
diversity at Board level, it may not always 
be in the best interest of shareholders 
to prioritise this above other factors. 
The Committee will consider the Davis 
Report’s recommendations, along with all 
other appropriate factors, when making 
future recommendations to the Board.

exeCUtIve CoMMIttee

The Executive Committee consists of 
the three Managing Directors of ICG, 
each of whom has a specific area of 
responsibility. The Executive Committee 
has general responsibility for ICG’s 
resources, determining strategy, financial 
and operational control and managing the 
business worldwide. Christophe Evain is 
Chief Executive Officer and in addition to his 
strategic and operational remit he oversees 
the Group’s Investment Committees in his 
role as the Chief Investment Officer. He is 
also responsible for the Group’s credit funds 
business. Philip Keller is Chief Financial 
Officer and is responsible for finance 
and infrastructure. Benoît Durteste has 
responsibility for the European mezzanine 
and minority equity business of ICG.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014The Board has delegated the following 
responsibilities to the Executive Committee:

 – The development and recommendation 

of strategic plans for consideration by the 
Board that reflect the longer term

 – Objectives and priorities established by 

the Board

 – Implementation of the strategies and 

policies of the Group as determined by 
the Board

 – Monitoring of operating and financial 
results against plans and budgets

 – Monitoring the quality of the 

investment process

 – Developing and implementing risk 

management systems

reLatIonshIps WIth sharehoLDers 

The Company recognises the importance 
of communication with its shareholders, 
particularly through interim and annual 
reports and the AGM. The Chief Executive, 
Chief Financial Officer and the Chairmen 
of the Board and each of its Committees 
will be available to answer shareholders’ 
questions at the AGM. The numbers of 
proxy votes lodged in connection with the 
Company’s AGM are announced following 
the conclusion of the relevant meeting.

The Board is happy to enter into a dialogue 
with institutional shareholders based on a 
mutual understanding of objectives, subject 
to its duties regarding equal treatment of 
shareholders and the dissemination of 
inside information. The Chief Executive 
Officer and the Chief Financial Officer meet 
institutional shareholders on a regular basis, 
and the Chairman periodically contacts the 
Company’s major shareholders and offers 
to meet with them. The Board as a whole is 
kept fully informed of the views and concerns 
of the major shareholders. When requested 
to do so, Non Executive Directors will attend 
meetings with major shareholders.

InternaL ControL 

The Board has overall responsibility for the 
Company’s internal control system and 
reviews its effectiveness at least annually. 
Such a system of control is in place to give 
reasonable, but not absolute, assurance 
that assets are safeguarded, transactions 
are authorised and recorded properly and 
that material errors and irregularities are 
prevented or detected within a timely period.

Through the regular meetings of the Board 
and the schedule of matters reserved to the 
Board or its duly authorised Committees, 
the Board aims to maintain full and effective 
control over appropriate strategic, financial, 
operational and compliance issues. 
The Board has put in place an organisational 
structure with clearly defined lines of 
responsibility and delegation of authority.

The Board annually considers and approves 
a strategic plan and budget. In addition there 
are established procedures and processes 
in place for the making and monitoring 
of investments and the planning and 
controlling of expenditure. The Board also 
receives regular reports from the Executive 
Committee on the Company’s operational 
and financial performance, measured against 
the annual budget as well as regulatory and 
compliance matters.

The Company has in place arrangements 
whereby employees may raise matters 
of concern in confidence about possible 
improprieties in matters of financial reporting 
or other matters.

The rationale for the system of internal 
control is to maximise effectiveness for the 
commercial management of the business 
and to provide the Board with regular and 
effective reporting on the identified significant 
risk factors. The Board is responsible for 
determining strategies and policies for risk 
control, and management is responsible for 
implementing such strategies and policies.

The Board confirms that an ongoing process 
for identifying, evaluating and managing 
the Group’s significant risks has operated 
throughout the year and that, up to the date 
of the approval of the Directors’ report and 
financial statements, the Board continues 
to apply the procedures necessary to 
comply with the requirements of the Turnbull 
Committee guidelines ‘Internal Control – 
Guidance for Directors on the Combined 
Code’. For further details of the risks relating 

to the Group, please see pages 28 to 35 and 
the report of the Risk Committee on pages 
60 and 61.

GoInG ConCern stateMent

The Directors have at the time of approving 
the financial statements, a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the 
Group have adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the foreseeable 
future. Therefore they continue to adopt 
the going concern basis of preparing the 
financial accounts.

The Directors have made this assessment 
in light of the £678.3m cash and unutilised 
debt facilities following a period of high 
realisations, no significant bank facilities 
maturing until 2016, and after reviewing the 
Group’s latest forecasts for a period of two 
years from year end. 

The Group’s business activities, together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development, performance and position 
are set out in the Strategic report on 
pages 10 to 21. The financial position of 
the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position 
and borrowing facilities are described in 
the Financial review on pages 22 to 27. 
In addition, note 3 to the financial statements 
includes the Group’s objectives, policies 
and processes for managing its capital; its 
financial risk management objectives; details 
of its financial instruments and hedging 
activities; and its exposures to credit risk 
and liquidity risk.

The Directors believe that the Group and 
Company are well placed to manage its 
business risks successfully in the current 
economic environment.

The Directors continually monitor the debt 
profile of the Group and Company, and seek 
to refinance senior facilities a substantial 
period before they mature. The Group and 
Company have no facilities due to mature 
within the next 12 months.

52 / 53

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportAUDIT COMMITTee 
RepORT

KevIn parrY
Chairman of the Audit Committee

Dear shareholder

During the year we have focused on 
the complexity of regulation, particularly 
concerning audit rotation and tendering, 
and the communication of this Committee’s 
work to you. The changes have, in 
part, broadened the Committee’s work 
and, in part, formalised pre-existing 
review procedures. 

I have remained conscious of the need to 
ensure that contemporary developments do 
not detract from our established focus on 
judgemental areas of accounting and the 
quality of the control environment. 

The Board established a separate Risk 
Committee at the end of the 2013 financial 
year. The taking and control of risk is a 
fundamental aspect of operating in the 
financial sector. Good auditing requires a 
sound understanding of the Group’s risks, 
our appetite for risk taking and mitigations 
to limit downsides. Consequently, during 
the course of the current year, the Audit 
Committee has worked closely with the 
Risk Committee and the Remuneration 
Committee with the aim of effectively 
covering pertinent topics in one or 
other forum.

The following pages set out the Audit 
Committee report for financial year 2014. 
The report is structured into four parts:

1.  Committee governance: roles 

and responsibilities, composition 
and effectiveness

2.  Review of the year: the significant 

financial reporting and auditing issues 
we addressed

3.  Internal controls: the assessment of the 
adequacy of the control framework 

4.  External auditors: ensuring their 

independence, effectiveness and 
objectivity; and their appointment

The report sets out in detail the significant 
issues considered during the year. From my 
perspective the most important issues were:

 – Valuation of the portfolio and assessment 
of impairments – the valuation of unquoted 
illiquid assets and any impairment requires 
considerable professional judgement. 
Consequently, the Committee undertakes 
a comprehensive review at each balance 
sheet date challenging management’s 
assessments based on established 
processes and a judgemental sample of 
direct file reviews

 – Tax provisioning – the Group has some 
historical employee related tax issues 
that were put in place when businesses 
undertook more aggressive tax planning 
than your Directors would contemplate 
today. In order to avoid conflicts of interest, 
the Chairmen of the Remuneration and 
Audit Committees constituted an ad 
hoc team overseeing communications 
with HM Revenue and Customs, 
and current and former employees. 
Professional advice and opinions were 
provided by internal and external tax 
lawyers and tax accountants as well as 
by HMRC. The accounting treatment has 
been carefully considered in the light of 
remaining uncertainties, also drawing on 
the advice of experts. See note 11 to the 
financial statements

 – Security of data and the procedural 
formalities of the IT department – 
we reviewed our expectations of IT 
capabilities and the need for security 
and continuity of service in light of the 
growth of the Group and the prevalence 
of cybercrime. Both best practice and 
the law emphasise data security and 
integrity. Based on a comprehensive 
review by specialist consultants, we were 
advised that the IT function would benefit 
from additional resource and a wider 
international perspective to provide greater 
likelihood of the continuity and security of 
service. The resource has been recruited

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014 – Relationship with the external auditors 
– it is fundamental that our auditors are 
independent of management and provide 
robust challenge to the financial reporting 
and disclosures. Based on our enquiries, 
we are satisfied that Deloitte LLP and 
the incumbent audit partner are effective 
and that they have robust processes 
for maintaining their objectivity and 
independence in accordance with our and 
their procedures. We have commenced 
planning for future audit partner and 
firm rotation

 – Requirement for an internal audit function 

– the Committee have continued to 
monitor the need for an independent 
internal audit function. During the year 
we continued our practice of undertaking 
ad hoc internal audits using part-time 
resource but have now concluded that 
there needs to be either a properly 
outsourced or a dedicated internal auditor 
operating to a structured programme

In the year ahead the Committee will 
continue to monitor new developments in 
regulation, particularly as they impact audit 
tendering, and to consider the audit risks 
associated with new business initiatives 
arising from the continued development 
of the Group.

I would be pleased to discuss the 
Committee’s work with any shareholder. 

KevIn parrY
Chairman of the Audit Committee
23 May 2014

CoMMIttee GovernanCe
On behalf of the Board, the Committee 
encourages and seeks to safeguard high 
standards of integrity and conduct in financial 
reporting and internal control. 

and Kim Wahl. Full details of their attendance 
at Committee meetings can be found in the 
Corporate Governance section on page 51. 
Biographical details can be found on pages 
48 and 49. 

roLe anD responsIBILItIes

The Committee meets regularly, at least four 
times a year, and is responsible for:

 – Selecting and recommending the 

appointment and reappointment of the 
external auditor, approving their terms of 
reference and fees

 – Reviewing the performance of the external 
auditor and ensuring the rotation of audit 
partner to an individual with relevant 
experience and skills

 – Reviewing the independence of the 
external auditor and the relationship 
between audit and non audit work 
performed by the external auditor

 – Reviewing the annual and interim 

accounts before they are presented 
to the Board, in particular addressing 
any significant issues arising from the 
audit; accounting policies and clarity of 
disclosures; compliance with applicable 
accounting and legal standards; and 
issues regarding a significant element 
of judgement

 – Reviewing the provisioning policy for the 

investment portfolio on a six monthly basis

 – Monitoring the integrity of the financial 
statements of the Group, including its 
annual and half yearly reports, interim 
management statements and any 
other formal announcement relating 
to its financial performance, reviewing 
significant financial reporting issues and 
judgements which they contain

The Committee has fulfilled its responsibilities 
during the year.

CoMposItIon

The Committee consists of independent 
Non Executive Directors only. The current 
members are Kevin Parry (Chairman of the 
Committee), Peter Gibbs, Lindsey McMurray 

The Committee members have a wide 
range of business and financial experience, 
including risk management, fund 
management and investment, regulation 
and compliance, M&A, tax and international 
business practices. These skills enable the 
Committee to fulfil its terms of reference 
in a robust and independent manner. 
Kevin Parry, a Chartered Accountant, 
was recently the Chief Financial Officer 
at Schroders plc and was previously a 
managing partner at KPMG. The Board 
considers that he has recent and relevant 
financial experience for the purposes of 
the Code. 

The Managing Directors and Chairman of the 
Board are not members of the Committee 
but regularly attend meetings at the invitation 
of the Chairman of the Committee, together 
with Deloitte LLP, the Company’s auditor. 

The Committee meets the external auditors 
without the management present twice a 
year to ensure that they are receiving full 
cooperation from management, obtaining 
all the information they require and are 
able to raise matters directly with the Audit 
Committee if they consider it is desirable to 
do so. 

effeCtIveness

The Committee reviews its terms of 
reference and effectiveness annually. 
The 2014 review adopted a more 
comprehensive questionnaire than previously 
and was completed by all Audit Committee 
members and regular Group attendees. 
The review included best practice questions. 
The results confirmed that the Committee 
continues to operate effectively, fulfils its 
terms of reference and receives reliable and 
trustworthy information from management 
and auditors. Based on the results of the 
review the Audit Committee members would 
like more training on market developments 
and this will, in future, be undertaken with the 
Risk Committee. 

54 / 55

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportAUDIT COMMITTee RepORT
continued

revIeW of the Year

sUMMarY of MeetInGs In the Year

The Committee held four meetings during the year in line with the financial reporting dates. 
In addition there were three sub-committee meetings between March and May to review 
drafts of the 2014 Annual Report which included new disclosure and reporting requirements. 

These three meetings were the culmination of much preparatory discussion and work over a 
number of months and were timed so as to avoid structural presentational issues detracting 
from the review of detailed content issues near to the Annual Report’s publication date. 

Over the course of the year the Committee considered and discussed the following 
significant matters. 

the IssUe anD Its sIGnIfICanCe WorK UnDertaKen 

CoMMents anD ConCLUsIon

fInanCIaL reportInG

The content of the annual,  
semi-annual and  
quarterly financial  
reporting needs to be  
appropriate,  
complying with laws  
and regulation. 

Taken as a whole, the Annual  
Report needs to be fair, balanced  
and understandable so that it is  
relevant to readers. This is a new  
requirement for 2014.

Investments represent 84% of our 
total assets. 50% are carried at 
fair value and 50% are carried at 
amortised cost. As the assets are 
mainly unquoted and illiquid, 
(see note 17 to the financial 
statements), considerable 
professional judgement is required 
in determining their valuations 
and associated provisions.

We determined there were no important changes 
to IFRS in the EU; we reviewed the accounting 
policies for continued appropriateness and 
consistency. The Committee requested a paper 
on the accounting treatment and disclosure of new 
and complex transactions, including any judgement 
areas. This included the consolidation of US 
Collateralised Loan Obligations (CLOs) and whether 
the Group controlled any portfolio companies 
following restructurings. 

We concluded that the accounting policies 
(see pages 99 to 104) are appropriate and, 
based on our enquiries of management 
and auditors, are being properly applied. 
We also concluded that the areas of 
judgement (see pages 103 and 104) are 
properly explained. We gained comfort 
from financial management and the 
auditors that the Group complied with 
reporting requirements. 

We consider that this year’s Annual Report 
benefits from the new guidance and believe 
it will increase understanding of the Group. 
We recommended to the Board that it could 
confirm it has met the new requirements 
(see page 86).

We will monitor feedback for future 
enhancements.

The Committee concurred with the 
valuations and did not determine there 
was a need for any adjustment.

We held preparatory discussions with management 
to determine the format of the Annual Report and 
then assigned responsibilities for the content of the 
Report and its overall cohesion and understandability. 
We subsequently received confirmation that those 
responsibilities had been fulfilled and commented 
extensively on design and detailed content. We used 
the Executive Directors’, the external auditors and 
the Committee’s knowledge to review a late draft for 
overall fairness, balance and understandability prior to 
final approval by the Board.

We reviewed a detailed paper on the valuation 
process management have undertaken and the 
judgements made in determining the value of 
the portfolio. In addition to reliance on executive 
management procedures and the work of the 
auditors, the Committee continued its practice of 
a member of the Committee (who is selected in 
rotation) reviewing a small judgemental sample of 
the investments including a file review and challenge 
of management. The Committee accordingly 
gained substantive evidence of the appropriateness 
of reliance on compliance with the Group’s 
valuation procedures.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014the IssUe anD Its sIGnIfICanCe WorK UnDertaKen 

CoMMents anD ConCLUsIon

Provisions are required for actual 
and potential liabilities that cannot 
be quantified accurately as to 
timing or quantum.

We reviewed the Group’s legal, tax and other 
exposures. It was determined that the biggest 
judgements concerned tax and in particular 
employee taxation (see covering letter to this 
Committee’s report). The Committee received 
feedback from the ad hoc group, challenging its 
views based on professional advice.

Income recognition and cash flows 
are not entirely aligned which can 
result in income being recognised 
prematurely or too late. This can 
arise from restructurings as well as 
from new investments.

We were briefed on the internal control systems, 
including frequent reconciliations that are in place 
to ensure the accounting for income is appropriate. 
We also reviewed issues arising from prior 
periods that were potentially relevant to the 2014 
financial year.

The Committee determined that there 
remains uncertainty over the quantum of 
the settlement that it anticipates concluding 
with HMRC and accordingly it is premature 
to amend existing estimates which are 
quantified in note 11 to the financial 
statements. The Committee’s current 
assessment is that the provision is more 
likely to be prudent than insufficient.

We concluded that there was no current 
year misstatement and that the impact of 
prior year issues was minor.

The Group needs to be a going 
concern. The whole basis of 
accounting assumes that the Group 
can continue to operate for the 
foreseeable future.

We reviewed the Board papers on financing. 
The time spent on this topic was reduced this year 
because the tightness of financing experienced in 
prior years no longer prevails.

The Committee concluded that the Group is 
comfortably funded and is a going concern 
(see page 53).

the IssUe anD Its sIGnIfICanCe WorK UnDertaKen 

CoMMents anD ConCLUsIon

aUDItInG

The auditor needs to be 
independent of management to 
report on the truth and fairness 
of the Annual Report without 
conflicts of interest.

The audit process needs to be 
effective so that the auditor’s 
opinion is robust.

We reviewed the standing policies on services that 
can be provided by Deloitte (see External Auditors 
on page 59) for their continued appropriateness as 
to scope and fees. We received confirmations from 
management and Deloitte of adherence and agreed 
the adherence to the fees paid. We also reviewed the 
audit fees in the context of the size and complexity 
of the audit.

We concluded that with only minor 
amendments, our policy remains 
appropriate and in line with best practice. 

We determined that the Group audit fee 
needed to increase from £0.5m to £0.7m 
to reflect the scope and complexity of work 
undertaken by Deloitte. We anticipate the 
need for a further fee increase in 2015.

We ensured through enquiry that Deloitte had a 
good understanding of the risks faced by the Group, 
that they took full account of professional guidance 
and designed audit procedures that were specific 
to the Group. We ensured that the procedures were 
designed to pick up material errors and frauds and 
reflected on the Audit Quality Review findings and its 
generic recommendations. The Group risks are set 
out on pages 28 to 35 and the key audit risks are set 
out in the Audit report on page 88. We monitored 
progress from planning to the final opinion at 
each Audit Committee through private meetings, 
discussion at Audit Committees and through 
written reports.

We are satisfied that the audit is effective.

The Committee decided it could improve its 
own procedures by receiving oral reports 
directly from selected overseas partners of 
Deloitte. This will commence with a report 
from the Asia Pacific partners based in 
Sydney and Singapore at the conclusion 
of their local audits.

56 / 57

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportAUDIT COMMITTee RepORT
continued

the IssUe anD Its sIGnIfICanCe WorK UnDertaKen 

CoMMents anD ConCLUsIon

aUDItInG ContInUeD

The audit is conducted to an 
appropriate level of materiality to 
ensure that there is strong comfort 
that the financial statements are 
true and fair.

The audit is properly conducted 
in practice. This ensures that the 
audit findings are discussed with 
the Committee.

ICG has volatile profitability due to capital gains 
and losses and impairments. We determined in 
conjunction with Deloitte that it is appropriate to base 
materiality on 10% profit before capital gains and 
losses and impairments and that individual capital 
gains and losses should be audited in their entirety. 

The FY14 profit is overstated by £0.4m as a result 
of prior year audit differences. The Committee has 
deemed this amount immaterial.

We received a memorandum on the audit findings 
and discussed its content with Deloitte in the 
Committee with and without management being 
present. The audit did not result in any changes to 
the reported profit. A number of disclosures were 
enhanced on the recommendation of the auditors 
to provide clarity. A number of useful control 
enhancements around formalising and documenting 
our existing practices for loans and receivables were 
recommended. No fraud was identified.

The audit materiality was set at 10% of profit 
before capital gains and losses equivalent 
to £12m (2013: £16m). This is equivalent 
to 7.6% (2013: 11.2%) of pre-tax profits. 
The Committee considered this provides 
appropriate comfort as to the quantification 
of the robustness of Deloitte’s audit opinion.

We were satisfied with the outputs 
of the audit and have tasked financial 
management with implementing the 
recommended enhancements to the 
control environment.

In addition to the significant matters addressed above, the Committee maintained a rolling agenda of items for its review including financial 
crime, whistleblowing and the finance function’s capabilities. No issues of significance arose. 

InternaL ControLs
Risk management and internal control 
matters are the responsibility of the Group’s 
Risk Committee. Its report is set out on 
pages 60 and 61. 

The Group has an established control 
framework as described on page 28. 
The framework is designed to manage but 
not eliminate risks and is designed to provide 
reasonable but not absolute assurance 
against material losses or misstatements. 
The Group is expanding and this adds to 
complexity and risk. To date, there has 
been no internal audit function but ad hoc 
reviews have either been outsourced or 
conducted by other control functions such 
as Compliance. This has been a subject of 
regular review by the Audit Committee in 

the context of the Group’s complexity, the 
norm for the financial sector and regulatory 
expectations and standards. 

For example, in 2014 there was a review 
of the IT function. This was commissioned 
from a consultancy with deep IT expertise. 
It raised a number of important issues 
highlighting limitations of the current 
arrangements. Issues raised around data 
security and disaster recovery planning were 
promptly addressed where possible and 
extra skilled staff were engaged in respect 
of matters that would take time to resolve 
and improve, typically requiring system 
enhancements or geographic relocation. 

In the light of the benefit attained from the  
IT report and the increasing size of the 
Group, the Audit Committee has determined 
that it is necessary to have either a properly 
planned outsourced Internal Audit function 
or an internal auditor who is an employee. 
Further there should be a two year audit 
programme of work that has a rolling agenda 
with time for flexibility to address any issues 
that emerge. The marginal direct cost is 
estimated to be £0.2m. 

The Audit Committee will oversee the 
installation of the Internal Audit function in 
the 2015 financial year and there will be a 
direct line of report to the Audit Committee 
Chairman. If the function is outsourced to 
one or more providers, Deloitte which is 
our external auditor, will be precluded from 
the work. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014During the year the Group paid £401,000 to 
Deloitte LLP for the provision of corporate 
non audit services. Of this, £92,000 is in 
respect of services in their capacity as 
auditors and £309,000 in the form of tax 
compliance and advisory services not related 
to the audit of the financial statements. 
These were provided by Deloitte as they are 
judged to be a market leader in these areas, 
having a reputation for quality, and having a 
local presence in the countries in which the 
services were performed. Audit objectivity 
and independence was safeguarded in 
these instances through the advice being 
provided by partners and staff that have 
no involvement in the audit of the financial 
statements. The advice was not dependent 
on a particular accounting treatment and 
the outcome or consequences of the 
advice did not have a material effect on the 
Group’s financial statements. No services 
were provided pursuant to contingent fee 
arrangements. A detailed analysis of fees 
paid to Deloitte LLP is shown in note 9 on 
page 119. EU audit legislation introduces 
certain restrictions on the provision of 
non audit services including a 70%  
non audit services fee cap. The restrictions 
on non audit services will become effective 
two years from the date of entry into force  
of the regulation; as such, it is expected to  
be in force for the 2016 financial year. 

externaL aUDItors
Deloitte LLP has been the Company’s 
external auditor since its commencement 
of trading. In accordance with professional 
and regulatory standards the lead audit 
partner has changed regularly since that 
time to safeguard the independence and 
objectivity of the audit process. The most 
recent audit partner rotation was in 2010 
and the current audit partner’s five year term 
will end at the conclusion of the 2015 audit. 
We have been monitoring audit regulatory 
developments determined by the FRC, 
Competition Commission and the EU. 
The EU has recently approved legislation 
that will require us to change our audit firm 
by no later than after the 2020 year end. 
We await the final requirements from the 
Competition Commission later this year. 
Absent any major service or quality issues, 
the desirability of a change of auditors is a 
delicate balance between a ‘fresh pair of 
eyes’ and accumulated knowledge applied 
to produce a robust audit. Consequently, 
based on our understanding of legislation, 
we anticipate that Deloitte will rotate their 
audit partner after the 2015 audit and then, 
in good time for the 2020 year end, the audit 
will be tendered and rotated to another firm 
of auditors. It is proposed that David Barnes 
will succeed Calum Thomson as our audit 
partner, and we are satisfied that he has the 
experience and industry knowledge to be 
the lead audit partner. The timing of auditor 
rotation will be kept under annual review and 
if legislation changes, or if the UK determines 
different rotation rules to the EU regulations, 
or there are any concerns as to Deloitte’s 
independence, the quality of their audit or the 
service levels, the audit tender and rotation 
might be undertaken sooner.

The Committee undertakes an annual 
evaluation to assess the independence and 
objectivity of the external auditor and the 
effectiveness of the audit process, taking 
into consideration relevant professional and 
regulatory requirements. The assessment 
focuses on quality of service and so aims 
to be broader than just reaching views 
on a particular audit. This assessment is 
based on the results of questionnaires 
completed by the Committee members, the 
Executive Directors and other relevant senior 
management. The results of the evaluation 
were last reported to the Audit Committee 
in September 2013. Having completed the 
review, and discussed its findings with the 
auditors, the Committee remains content 
with Deloitte’s work whilst identifying some 
areas for service improvement: feedback 
on the prudence of impairments and tax 
provisions and advance information on 
the reasons for cost overruns. The Audit 
Committee discussed the output with 
Deloitte and they have assured the 
Committee they will seek to address 
the areas where they can improve the 
service delivery. 

The Committee regularly monitors non 
audit services being provided to the Group 
by its external auditor to ensure there is 
no impairment to their independence or 
objectivity. Stringent procedures are in 
place to ensure that all significant non audit 
work performed by the auditor in excess 
of £50,000 is approved in advance by 
the Committee. Engagements are only 
approved if they do not and will not impair, or 
appear to impair, the auditor’s judgement or 
independence. The procedures set out the 
categories of non audit services which the 
external auditor will and will not be allowed 
to provide to the Group, including those 
which are pre-approved by the Committee 
and those which require specific approval 
before they are contracted for, subject to de 
minimus levels. 

58 / 59

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportRISk COMMITTee RepORT

Dear shareholder

CoMMIttee GovernanCe

KevIn parrY
Chairman of the Risk Committee

During the year we have focused on the 
risks impacting the Group, particularly 
those arising from the Group’s geographic 
expansion and consequently increased 
exposure to regulation. 

The Board established a separate Risk 
Committee at the end of the 2013 financial 
year. The identification, control, mitigation 
and reporting of risks is a fundamental 
aspect of operating in the financial 
sector. Good practice requires a sound 
understanding of the Group’s risks, our 
appetite for risk taking and mitigations to limit 
downsides. Consequently, during the course 
of the current year, the Risk Committee has 
worked closely with the Audit Committee 
with the aim of effectively covering pertinent 
topics in one or other forum.

The following pages set out the Risk 
Committee report for the financial year. 
The report considers:

1.  Committee governance: our scope and 

terms of reference

2.  Review of the year: the significant risk 

issues we addressed

roLe anD responsIBILItIes

The Committee meets regularly, at least 
three times a year, and is responsible for:

 – Keeping under review the effectiveness of 
the Group’s risk management systems

 – Reviewing and approving the statements 

to be included in the Annual Report 
concerning risk management

 – Reviewing any reports on the 

effectiveness of systems risk management

 – Reviewing the Group’s procedures for 
identifying, assessing, controlling and 
mitigating the material risks faced by the 
Group and to ensure these procedures 
allow proportionate and independent 
investigation of such matters and 
appropriate follow up action

CoMposItIon

The Committee consists of Non Executive 
Directors only. The current members are 
Kevin Parry (Chairman of the Committee), 
Justin Dowley, Peter Gibbs, Lindsey 
McMurray and Kim Wahl. Full details of their 
attendance at Committee meetings can be 
found in the Corporate Governance section 
on page 51. Biographical details can be 
found on pages 48 and 49. 

The Committee members have a wide 
range of business and financial experience, 
including risk management, fund 
management and investment, regulation 
and compliance, M&A, tax and international 
business practices. These skills enable the 
Committee to fulfil its Terms of Reference in a 
robust and independent manner. 

The Managing Directors of the Board are 
not members of the Committee but attend 
meetings at the invitation of the Chairman of 
the Committee. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014 – ICAAP – during the year, the Committee 
reviewed the capital adequacy of the 
Group having regard to all risks facing 
the Group as required under the Internal 
Capital Adequacy Assessment Process 
(‘ICAAP’) of the FCA. The ‘Pillar 3’ 
disclosures required to be made public as 
a result are available on the Company’s 
website at www.icgplc.com

In the year ahead the Committee will 
continue to monitor the risks faced by the 
Group in delivering its strategic objectives, 
in particular risks arising from the exposure 
to new regulations or developments in 
regulation and risks associated with new 
business initiatives arising from the continued 
development of the Group.

I would be pleased to discuss the 
Committee’s work with any shareholder. 

KevIn parrY
Chairman of the Risk Committee
23 May 2014

revIeW of the Year
Set out below are the significant issues 
considered during the year: 

 – Specific risks arising from the Group’s 
exposure to new regulations and from 
undertaking activities in new jurisdictions 
– during the year the Group drew closer 
to undertaking activities in a number of 
jurisdictions, predominantly the United 
States, Singapore and more recently, 
Japan. In all instances this attracts new 
regulation and exposes the Group to new 
regulatory regimes. Consequently, the 
Committee has been kept informed of the 
development of policies and procedures 
to satisfy the respective regulations 
and has challenged management’s 
assessments of the adequacy of the 
proposed policies and procedures. 
The Committee will undertake geographic 
reviews in the future to assess the Group’s 
compliance with regulatory reporting

 – Material risks – the Group uses a risk 

scorecard as part of its risk framework 
that summarises the material risks faced 
by the Group, the tolerance of the Group 
to each respective risk, and key risk 
indicators that indicate, for each risk, the 
extent to which the tolerance is being 
approached or has been exceeded. 
The Committee has overseen and 
challenged the Group’s management 
of material risks by reference to the risk 
scorecard which has been presented to 
the Committee periodically during the year

 – Material risks – toward the end of the 

year the Committee has overseen a high 
level review of the material risks faced by 
the Group. In recognition of the Group’s 
transition toward an alternative asset 
manager, the Committee challenged 
whether the material risks faced by 
the Group remained wholly relevant. 
This exercise, which is ongoing, has 
re-affirmed the majority of the prevailing 
material risks while highlighting the need 
to add or remove a small number of 
material risks

60 / 61

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportWe are comfortable that staff reward remains 
strongly linked to the performance of the 
business and that:

 – The link of the AAP to cash profit ensures 
staff remain focused on the delivery of 
successful investment outcomes

 – A significant proportion is delivered in 

shares to align employee interests with 
those of shareholders

 – The majority of the variable pay is 

subject to deferral of which an element 
is linked to the performance of the 
Investment Company

Although we have not consulted 
shareholders on any specific aspect of 
remuneration this year we have regular 
dialogue with our major shareholders when 
we discuss remuneration. 

I hope that you will find our new look report 
informative. I look forward to your support at 
the AGM where I will be happy to address 
any questions you may have.

peter GIBBs
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
23 May 2014

DIReCTORS’ 
ReMUNeRATION RepORT

There have been no major changes in the 
way that we remunerate our staff during the 
course of 2013/14 although we have made 
minor amendments to the definition of cash 
profit to ensure that the remuneration of 
existing staff was not adversely affected by 
the development of our in house distribution 
team and to correct an anomaly relating to 
the treatment of rolled up interest. These are 
detailed later in the report.

Business performance has been much 
improved in FY14:

 – Third party assets under management up 

8% to €10.7bn

 – Record level of fundraisings at €3.8bn

 – Record level of realisations bringing in 

proceeds of £1.1bn

 – Cash core income increasing to £231.7m 

versus £39.9m in FY13

 – Strong progress in delivering product and 

geographic diversification

 – Significant investment in new staff – 

average headcount increased by 21.1%

This has had a significantly positive impact 
on the AAP which is £101.7m this year 
(compared with a negative £3.2m in FY13 
which, in turn, showed a decline from 
£49.5m from FY12). We are not proposing 
to distribute the full amount of the AAP 
available for FY14. The proposed incentive 
awards for FY14 are estimated at 14.8% of 
cash profit, resulting in a three year rolling 
average of 20.6% since the inception of the 
Plan in FY12.

Cash profit, by its very nature, is highly 
volatile and for this reason we measure the 
AAP on a rolling basis over a five year period. 
The Remuneration Committee believes 
that 30% is an appropriate rolling average 
percentage of cash profit to distribute 
as variable pay under the AAP at the 
present time but, if changes in the Group’s 
business model indicate that a different 
percentage is warranted, the Remuneration 
Committee would enter into dialogue with 
major investors to determine what that level 
should be.

peter GIBBs
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

Dear shareholder

I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
remuneration report for the financial year 
ended 31 March 2014. This is in a different 
format from previous years, reflecting the 
new requirements brought in by Schedule 8 
to the Large and Medium-sized Companies 
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013. 

In accordance with the new regulations, 
the Directors’ remuneration report is in 
three parts: this statement, the Directors’ 
remuneration policy and the Annual report on 
remuneration. The Directors’ remuneration 
policy will be put to a binding shareholder 
vote at the Annual General Meeting (AGM) 
on 23 July 2014; the Annual report on 
remuneration (together with this statement) is 
subject to an advisory vote at the AGM in the 
same way as in the past.

Our remuneration philosophy is to reward 
our employees in a similar manner to 
private equity businesses so that we are 
able to recruit and retain people of the right 
calibre to achieve our business objectives. 
All variable remuneration earned by our 
staff (other than third party carry and similar 
arrangements which do not give rise to a 
liability on the Company) is payable out of the 
Annual Award Pool (AAP) which we target 
at an average of 30% of cash profit over 
a rolling five year period. Cash profit is an 
important measure of how well we’re running 
our business.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014DIReCTORS’ 
ReMUNeRATION pOlICy

This section describes the remuneration 
policy for Managing Directors that has 
been in operation since 2010 and which is 
intended to continue to apply from the date 
of the 2014 AGM, subject to shareholder 
approval at that meeting. 

annUaL aWarD pooL

The central feature of ICG’s remuneration 
policy is the AAP. All incentives awarded 
across the Group under:

 – The Omnibus Plan

 – The Balance Sheet Carry Plan

 – Any performance fees paid to the Fund 
Management Company (FMC) that are 
distributed to employees

are governed by an overall limit that is 
currently 30% of cash profit over a rolling 
five year period. This percentage may be 
exceeded in any year but must not be 
exceeded on an aggregate average basis 
over five years.

Cash profit is defined as profit before tax 
and incentive schemes, adjusted so that:

 – Interest income and capital gains are only 

recognised on a cash basis

 – Net impairments are only recognised on 

principal investment

 – Fair value movement of derivatives 

is excluded

A further adjustment is made to cash profit to 
reflect the remuneration cost of our in house 
distribution team. The variable pay of all 
employees (including the distribution team) is 
awarded out of the expanded AAP. 

The current AAP limit is considered by the 
Committee to be appropriate for our existing 
business model. As the Group’s business 
develops and expands into new markets 
and products, the Committee will assess the 
ongoing appropriateness of the 30% limit. 
Should it be determined that the limit should 
be amended, the Committee will engage 
with shareholders.

aWarDs faLLInG WIthIn the 
annUaL aWarD pooL

The Omnibus Plan provides for three 
different award types to be made over  
ICG shares: Deferred Share Award,  
PLC Equity Awards and FMC Equity 
Awards. FMC Equity Awards are not made 
to individuals who are Managing Directors. 
In addition, performance fees receivable by 
the FMC together with any other incentives 
funded by ICG are distributed under the 
umbrella of the AAP. Only Third Party Carry 
(TPC) and similar arrangements in respect 
of ICG direct investment funds or business 
acquisitions that do not give rise to a cost 
or liability to the Company are outside of 
the AAP.

The policy is based on the following 
remuneration principles.

reMUneratIon prInCIpLes

Five guiding principles are reflected in 
the design of the staff compensation 
arrangements.

aLIGnMent BetWeen staff anD 
sharehoLDers

AAP (30% of cash profit cap on 
expected value of awards ensures long 
term affordability)

sUpport the LonG terM Corporate 
strateGY

Balance Sheet Carry awards reflect the long 
term corporate strategy to invest successfully 
and maximise returns. Key staff remunerated 
to grow value in the FMC

proMote staff eqUItY oWnershIp

The majority of executive remuneration 
is in the form of equity; and shareholding 
guidelines have been introduced

transparent

All aspects of remuneration are clear to 
employees and openly communicated  
to employees and shareholders

‘Cash on Cash’

The ‘cash on cash’ principle ensures 
that employees are only rewarded for 
realised gains

annUaL aWarD pooL
(30% of cash profit)

annUaL  
BonUs

(including Deferred 
Share Awards)

pLC  
eqUItY

fMC  
eqUItY

BaLanCe  
sheet CarrY

perforManCe 
fees

62 / 63

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ ReMUNeRATION pOlICy
continued

fUtUre poLICY taBLe

The table below outlines each element of the remuneration policy for the Directors of the Company.

saLarY

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Adequate to recruit and retain Managing Directors who will drive the 
business forward

Base salaries for the Managing Directors for the 2014/15 financial year are 
set out on page 79.

Designed to be sufficient to ensure that employees  
do not become dependent on their bonuses

Reflects local competitive market levels

In considering base salary increases, the Committee considers the range 
of salary increases applying across the Group and local market levels

Increases do not normally exceed the average staff increase, except in the 
case of a change of role or responsibility

operatIon

Paid monthly

Normally reviewed annually

BenefIts

perforManCe ConDItIons

None

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Appropriate to recruit and retain Managing Directors who will drive the 
business forward

Provision and level of benefits are competitive and appropriate in the 
context of the local market

Reflects local competitive market levels

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

Benefits currently receivable by Managing Directors include life assurance, 
private medical insurance and income protection

None

pensIon

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Adequate to recruit and retain Managing Directors who will drive the 
business forward

The pension allowance available to Managing Directors is 15%  
of basic salary

Helps Managing Directors to provide for their retirement

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

All Managing Directors are entitled to a pension allowance payable  
each month with salaries

None

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014annUaL BonUs anD DeferreD share aWarDs

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Rewards employees for delivering cash profits, managing the cost base, 
employing sound risk and business management

A Managing Director’s annual bonus and Deferred Share Award are drawn 
from the AAP which is capped

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

A Managing Director’s annual bonus is drawn from the AAP, and so is 
directly determined by reference to the Group’s cash profit for the relevant 
financial year

A Managing Director’s annual bonus entitlement is also based on 
performance against objectives, which are derived from the Group’s 
key performance indicators

No further performance conditions apply to Deferred Share Awards

Awards are made after the end of the financial year

The annual bonus is awarded as cash and deferred shares

Managing Directors will receive 50% of bonuses over £100,000 as 
Deferred Share Awards

Shares normally vest one third in each of the first, second and third years 
following the year of grant subject to continuing service. The Committee 
has discretion to vary the date of vesting if necessary or desirable for 
regulatory or legislative reasons

In the event of a change in control (other than an internal reorganisation) 
shares vest in full

Dividend equivalents accrue to participants during the vesting period 
and are paid at the vesting date

pLC eqUItY aWarD

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Rewards senior employees for increasing long term shareholder value

A Managing Director’s PLC Equity Award is drawn 
from the AAP which is capped

Aligns the interests of senior employees with those of shareholders

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

Awards are made after the end of the financial year

The awards are over shares in the Company

Shares normally vest one third in each of the third, fourth and fifth years 
following the year of grant unless the Executive leaves for cause or to join 
a competitor. The Committee has discretion to vary the date of vesting if 
necessary or desirable for regulatory or legislative reasons

In the event of a change in control (other than an internal reorganisation) 
shares vest in full

Dividend equivalents accrue to participants during the vesting period 
and are paid at the vesting date

A Managing Director’s PLC Equity Award is drawn from the AAP, and so 
is directly determined by reference to the Group’s cash profit in the relevant 
financial year

A Managing Director’s PLC Equity Award is also based on performance 
against objectives, which are derived from the Group’s key performance 
indicators

No further performance conditions apply to the PLC Equity Awards

64 / 65

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ ReMUNeRATION pOlICy
continued

fMC eqUItY aWarD

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Incentivises those employees charged with accelerating the expansion  
of the Company’s fund management business

All employees are eligible to participate in the FMC Equity Award scheme. 
No awards have been made under this plan to any individual while they 
have been a Managing Director and it is not intended that any will be  
made to Managing Directors in the future

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

FMC Equity Awards are drawn from the AAP, and so are directly 
determined by reference to the Group’s cash profit in the relevant 
financial year

Awards are based on performance against objectives, which are 
derived from the Group’s key performance indicators

No further performance conditions apply to FMC Equity Awards

Awards are made after the end of the financial year

The awards are over shares in FMC

Shares normally vest one third in each of the first, second and third years 
following the year of grant subject to continuing service. The Committee 
has discretion to vary the date of vesting if necessary or desirable for 
regulatory or legislative reasons

A holding period applies until the third year following the year of grant,  
at which time all vested FMC shares are automatically ‘exchanged’ for 
Company shares of an equivalent value

In the event of a change in control (other than an internal reorganisation) 
shares vest in full

The value of a share is determined by an independent valuation every year

BaLanCe sheet CarrY pLan

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Encourages investment executives to optimise returns on investment, whilst 
minimising defaults and losses

A Managing Director’s Balance Sheet Carry allocation is drawn from 
the AAP which is capped

Awards are made on the basis of grade and performance

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

A Managing Director’s Balance Sheet Carry Plan award is drawn from the 
AAP, and so is directly determined by reference to the Group’s cash profit 
in the previous year

The hurdle rate is fixed by the Committee, at its discretion, prior to making 
the first awards in each vintage. The Committee has not fixed a hurdle rate 
lower than 5% per annum

Takes the form of an ‘in house’ carry arrangement (i.e. on the returns 
from investments made by the Group on its balance sheet)

Awards will pay out by reference to the overall outcome for a year 
of investment (‘vintage’) and therefore take losses into account. 
Awards vest one third on 1 June following each of the first, second 
and third anniversaries of the start of the vintage year subject to 
continuing service

In the event of a change in control all awards vest

Payment is made on the realisation of investments, once a hurdle rate 
of return has been achieved on these investments

After repayment of capital and the payment of the related hurdle rate 
of return to the Group, participants become entitled to receive catch up 
payments until they have received up to 20% of the aggregate returns 
on investments in that vintage

Thereafter, participants are entitled to receive up to 20% of any further 
returns on that vintage

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014CarrIeD Interest over thIrD partY fUnDs (‘thIrD partY CarrY’ or ‘tpC’)

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Offers the types of incentive arrangements that are expected by fund 
investors and are offered by the Group’s competitors for talent

Awards of TPC and Shadow Carry are made to Managing Directors  
to reflect their seniority and involvement in the management of the  
relevant funds

Aligns the interests of the fund management teams with those of the fund 
investors, encouraging the best returns to be obtained, whilst minimising 
defaults and losses

Shadow Carry facilitates the participation by Managing Directors and other 
employees in TPC after the inception of the fund and after investments have 
been made

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

Certain employees who are involved in the management of a fund are 
invited to invest in the fund by acquiring interests in a carry partnership  
at the fair market value of the interests at the time of acquisition.  
The investment is made through an external structure established  
at the inception of the fund such that no liability arises to the Group

TPC participants receive a share of the profits arising on the realisation of 
investments made in that fund. No payments are made to TPC participants 
until the external investors have received an internal rate of return (IRR) 
(the hurdle) on the fund

Shadow Carry is the notional allocation of TPC interests that have not 
otherwise been acquired by employees. Payments are made to participants 
in respect of Shadow Carry when the hurdle has been met, through payroll, 
but are designed to mirror TPC payments in all other respects

TPC, Shadow Carry and similar arrangements that do not give rise to a cost 
or liability to the Company are outside the AAP

No performance conditions are considered to attach to TPC

Because participants in Shadow Carry have not made an investment in the 
carry partnership, the hurdle is considered to be a performance condition

the InterMeDIate CapItaL GroUp pLC saYe pLan 2004

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

Provides an opportunity for all employees to participate in the success of 
the Group

Employees may save the maximum permitted by legislation each month 
with this scheme

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

UK employees are offered the opportunity to save a regular amount each 
month over 36 months and receive a bonus at the end of the saving 
contract (subject to HMRC legislation)

At maturity, employees can exercise their option to acquire and purchase 
shares in ICG at the discounted price set at the award date or receive the 
accumulated cash

The Plan is not subject to any performance conditions, as per HMRC 
legislation

All UK employees are eligible to participate in the Plan

sharehoLDInG reqUIreMents

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

To align the interests of the Company’s Managing Directors with those  
of shareholders

A period of up to three years from 1 April 2012 has been agreed for 
Managing Directors to build up to the required shareholding

To promote share ownership

operatIon

A Managing Director is required to acquire ownership of a number of 
ordinary shares in the Company with a market value equal to a multiple  
of two times the Director’s annual base salary

If the shareholding requirement is not met within the timeframe specified, 
the Board will propose a course of action to bring the Managing Director’s 
shareholding to the required level

perforManCe ConDItIons

Not applicable

66 / 67

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ ReMUNeRATION pOlICy
continued

fees paID to non exeCUtIve DIreCtors

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

To facilitate the recruitment of Non Executive Directors who will oversee the 
development of strategy and monitor the Managing Directors’ stewardship 
of the business

Non Executive Directors cannot participate in any of the Company’s share 
schemes and are not eligible to join the designated Group pension plan

Fees are set and reviewed in line with market rates. Aggregate annual fees 
do not exceed the limit set out in the Articles of Association of £600,000

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

Fees are payable to Non Executive Directors for their services in positions 
upon the Board and various Committees 

None of the Non Executive Directors’ remuneration is subject to 
performance conditions

Fees for the Chairman are determined and reviewed annually by the 
Committee and fees for Non Executive Directors are determined by the Board

The Committee relies upon objective research on up to date relevant 
information for similar companies

LeGaCY reMUneratIon sCheMes
The following remuneration schemes formed part of the Company’s remuneration policy in previous years and are being phased out following 
a review of remuneration in 2010. No new awards will be made but some awards granted in earlier years and held by Managing Directors may 
vest when the approved policy is in force.

the KeY eMpLoYee retentIon share pLan (Kersp)

pUrpose anD LInK to strateGY

opportUnItY

To align the interests of the Company’s Managing Directors with those 
of shareholders

This is a legacy remuneration scheme – no new options have been 
awarded since June 2008

Vesting of options previously awarded is subject to the performance 
conditions set out below

The limit on any individual’s participation is 20% of the value of their 
monetary remuneration in the year of award

operatIon

perforManCe ConDItIons

The Key Employee Retention Share Plan (KERSP) was adopted on  
23 May 2005, under which an amount, up to 5% of the value of the MTIS 
pool (a legacy incentive scheme which has now closed), may be distributed 
to key Managing Directors in the form of share options with an exercise 
price equal to nil

In order to exercise these options, the Company must achieve a growth in 
earnings per share (EPS) of 5% per annum from the date of grant to the 
vesting date. It is unlikely that this performance condition will be met

notes to the poLICY taBLe

perforManCe MeasUres anD tarGets

The Annual Award Pool is determined by the Executive Committee and Remuneration Committee through an assessment of ICG’s financial 
performance. Cash profit provides a link between income generation for shareholders and employee compensation, ensuring that excessive 
awards to employees are not made and that any awards that are made are affordable on a cash basis. Management information is provided 
to the Executive Committee and Remuneration Committee on performance to ensure that financial results are put into the context of wider 
performance and risk appetite.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014The AAP is calculated as a cumulative average of 30% of cash profit from the year ending 31 March 2012 until the year ending 31 March 
2016, after which it is calculated as a five year rolling average. The 30% cap may be exceeded in any year as long as, over a five year period, 
on average the AAP does not exceed 30% of cash profit. A further adjustment is made to cash profit to reflect the remuneration cost of our 
in house fund distribution team. This team can significantly reduce the cost of external placement agent fees. The AAP is increased by the 
amount of this adjustment and the variable pay of all employees (including the fund distribution team) is awarded out of the expanded AAP. 

Once the AAP has been determined, it is then distributed based on an individual’s contribution and performance as determined by the annual 
appraisal process.

DIfferenCe In reMUneratIon poLICY for aLL eMpLoYees

All employees of ICG are entitled to base salary, benefits and (in most locations) pension. The variable compensation mix for all employees is 
drawn from the Annual Award Pool and is allocated according to the framework below, by reference to role, responsibility and performance.

Employee

Managing Director

Credit Fund Management Partner

Investment Partner

ICG Business Infrastructure Partner

Investment Director

Credit Fund Management Investment Director

ICG Business Infrastructure Director

Investment Associate Director

Credit Fund Management Associate Director

All other staff

Annual bonus

PLC Equity Award

FMC Equity Award

Balance Sheet Carry

Performance fees

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The variable compensation mix may be varied from the above if required by law or regulation.

The quantum of each of these awards is determined by the size of the Annual Award Pool, an individual’s seniority, contribution and their 
individual performance as determined by the annual appraisal process. In addition, all UK employees are eligible to join the Intermediate 
Capital Group plc SAYE Plan 2004.

CarrIeD Interest on thIrD partY fUnDs

The Company has established for its executives (including Managing Directors) carried interest arrangements under which between 60% and 
80% of the carried interest negotiated by the Company in respect of managed funds raised since 21 January 1998 is available for allocation 
to its executives. Those executives to whom allocations are made pay full market value for the interests at the time of acquisition so that no 
remuneration arises. The allocation of carried interest entitlements as at 31 March 2014 was as follows:

ICG  
Mezzanine  
Fund 1998

ICG  
Mezzanine  
Fund 2000

ICG  
Mezzanine  
Fund 2003

Intermediate 
Capital  
Asia Pacific  
Mezzanine  
Fund 2005

Intermediate 
Capital  
Asia  
Pacific  
Fund 2008

ICG  
Minority  
Partners  
Fund 2008

ICG  
European  
Fund 2006

ICG  
Recovery  
Fund 2008

ICG  
Europe  
Fund V

ICG  
Senior Debt 
Partners

Managing  
Directors

Former Managing  
Directors

Other  
executives

ICG

Total

13.4%

4.7%

12.4%

9.5%

18.5%

21.3%

21.1%

22.0%

21.6%

20.0%

27.5%

26.0%

25.1%

21.6%

14.5%

4.3%

21.1%

7.0%

0.0%

0.0%

20.6%

38.5%

29.3%

40.0%

37.5%

25.0%

43.9%

25.0%

47.0%

20.0%

54.4%

20.0%

37.8%

20.0%

51.0%

20.0%

58.4%

20.0%

60.0%

20.0%

100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

100.0% 100.0%

100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

These carry holdings include third party carry and shadow carry.

Further details of each of these funds can be found on page 19.

68 / 69

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ ReMUNeRATION pOlICy
continued

stateMent of ConsIDeratIon of eMpLoYMent ConDItIons  
eLseWhere In the CoMpanY anD eMpLoYee vIeWs
The Remuneration Committee considers the employment conditions and the remuneration structures in place for all employees of the Group 
when setting the Directors’ remuneration policy. This is demonstrated, for example, by the fact that a Managing Director’s annual incentive 
award is made from the same Annual Award Pool as provides for all other employees. The Group does not consult with employees when 
setting the Directors’ remuneration policy.

approaCh to reCrUItMent reMUneratIon
ICG operates in a highly specialised and competitive market, and so competition for talent is fierce. The Committee’s approach to recruitment 
remuneration is to pay what is sufficient to attract appropriate candidates to a role.

Newly recruited Managing Directors are offered a remuneration package similar to that of existing employees in the same job role. All Managing 
Directors are offered the same annual salary, benefits and pension and all participate in the Annual Award Pool and are subject to the same 
overall cap on incentives. Furthermore, objectives are assigned to the Managing Directors. However, it may be necessary to offer a new 
Managing Director a remuneration package that differs from that currently provided to the Managing Directors in order to attract the best 
recruit. This could include a higher base salary and relocation and/or housing benefits. 

Buying out deferred bonuses and long term incentives is permitted subject to, as far as possible, the timing, delivery mechanism (i.e. shares or 
cash) and amounts paid out being set to reflect any former arrangement including potential forfeiture of part or all of the former arrangement. 
As far as possible, the value of any replacement awards will reflect the expected value of the forfeited awards.

In the event of an internal promotion to the Board, the Committee reserves the right to allow any pre-existing awards or arrangements to 
continue notwithstanding that these may not be consistent with the approved policy.

servICe ContraCts anD poLICY on paYMents for Loss of offICe

ManaGInG DIreCtors

The Company’s policy is for Managing Directors to have one year rolling contracts which are deemed appropriate for the nature of the 
Company’s business.

Service contracts are held, and are available for inspection, at the Company’s registered office. The details of the service contracts for 
Managing Directors serving during the year are shown below.

Managing Director

Date of service contract Last re-elected

Notice period

Non-compete provisions

Christophe Evain

30 May 2006

17 July 2013

12 months

Philip Keller

12 October 2006

17 July 2013

12 months

Benoît Durteste

21 May 2012

17 July 2013

12 months

}

  Restraint period  
of 12 months

Compensation on termination by the  
company without notice or cause

The salary for any unexpired period 
of notice plus the cost to the Company 
(excluding NI contributions) of providing 
insurance benefits for the same period

The Committee reserves discretion to make an annual bonus award to a Managing Director in respect of the final full year of service, taking into 
account the circumstances of the individual’s termination of office and performance for the financial year concerned.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014Details of the treatment of long term incentive awards in the case of loss of office are shown below.

Long term incentive award

Status

Death, disability, long term  
ill health

Deferred Share Award Unvested

Early vesting

Redundancy

Cause or competing

Any other reason

Early vesting subject  
to discretion

N/A

PLC Equity Award

Unvested

Retain with early vesting Retain

FMC Equity Award

Vested, but not 
yet released

Unvested

Retain with early release  Retain

Retain with early vesting 
and release

Retain, subject to 
discretion

Balance Sheet Carry 
Plan

Vested

Retain

Retain

Carried Interest Over 
Third Party Funds

Unvested

Retain with immediate 
vesting

Forfeit, subject to 
discretion

Vested

Retain

Retain

Unvested

Forfeit, subject to 
discretion

Forfeit, subject to 
discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Retain, subject 
to discretion

Retain, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Retain, subject 
to discretion

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

Retain

Forfeit, subject 
to discretion

exerCIse of DIsCretIon

The discretion available to the Committee under the long term incentive plans is intended to provide the Committee with flexibility to deal fairly 
with every eventuality. In exercising its discretion, the Committee will take into account the circumstances in which the individual has left the 
Company, their performance and the impact that this has had on the Company’s overall performance.

non exeCUtIve DIreCtors

Non Executive Directors do not have contracts of service and are not eligible to join the designated Group pension plan.  
Details of Non Executive Directors’ letters of appointment are as shown below.

Non Executive Director

Date appointed

Last re-elected

Re-election frequency

Notice period 
(unless not re-elected)

Policy on payment 
for loss of office

Justin Dowley

Peter Gibbs

February 2006

March 2010

Lindsey McMurray

September 2012

Kevin Parry

Kim Wahl

June 2009

July 2012

July 2013

July 2013

July 2013

July 2013

July 2013

Annual 

Annual 

Annual 

Annual 

Annual 

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

None

None

None

None

None

70 / 71

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ ReMUNeRATION pOlICy
continued

ILLUstratIon of appLICatIon of reMUneratIon poLICY
The total remuneration for each of the Managing Directors that could result from the proposed remuneration policy in 2014/15 under three 
different performance levels is shown below.

Christophe Evain

Benoît Durteste

  Philip Keller

Fixed elements
Multiple period variable

Annual variable

Fixed elements
Multiple period variable

Annual variable

Fixed elements
Multiple period variable

Annual variable

£6.0m
22.8%

69.2%

£4.0m
34.2%

53.9%

£5.25m
26.0%

66.2%

£3.5m
39.1%

49.2%

£4.2m
22.6%

67.5%

£2.8m
33.9%

51.3%

8%

11.9%

£0.48m

100%

7.8%

11.7%

£0.41m
100%

9.9%

14.8%

£0.41m
100%

Maximum

On target

Fixed pay

Maximum

On target

Fixed pay

Maximum

On target

Fixed pay

The Annual variable pay included in the chart is in respect of the following elements of pay:

 – Annual bonus

 – Deferred Share Award

 – PLC Equity Award

 – Carried Interest over third party funds. Please see page 73 for details regarding the value of carried interest

The Multiple period variable pay included in the chart is in respect of the following elements of pay:

 – Balance Sheet Carry payments received

 – ‘Shadow’ carry payments received

The value of on target remuneration for each of the Managing Directors is based on the aggregate remuneration that the Committee has 
agreed should be receivable in the circumstances in which the Company achieves its targets. The maximum expected opportunity is 50% 
above the on target remuneration, but may be exceeded in circumstances of exceptional performance outcomes.

stateMent of ConsIDeratIon of sharehoLDer vIeWs
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for the overall remuneration policy for all the Company’s staff and ensures that the remuneration 
arrangements should take into account the long term interests of shareholders, investors and other stakeholders.

The Company recognises the importance of communication with its shareholders, particularly through interim and annual reports and the 
AGM. The Chief Executive, Chief Financial Officer and the Chairmen of the Board and each of its Committees will be available to answer 
shareholders’ questions at the AGM. The Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer meet institutional shareholders on a regular 
basis, and the Chairman periodically contacts the Company’s major shareholders and offers to meet with them. The Board as a whole is kept 
fully informed of the views and concerns of the major shareholders. When requested to do so, Non Executive Directors will attend meetings 
with major shareholders.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
ANNUAl RepORT  
ON ReMUNeRATION

sInGLe totaL fIGUre of reMUneratIon taBLe (aUDIteD)
The following table shows a single total figure of remuneration in respect of qualifying services for the financial year ended 31 March 2014  
for each Managing Director, together with comparative figures for the previous financial year:

salaries and 
fees  
£000

Benefits1 

£000

pension 
allowance 
£000

short term 
incentives, 
available 
as cash2
£000

total 
emoluments 
£000

short term 
incentives,
deferred3
£000

Long term
incentives4
£000

other
remuneration5
£000

single total 
figure of 
remuneration

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

350.0

340.0

77.1

74.6

52.5

51.0

575.0

147.5 1,054.6

613.1 3,475.0

866.0

267.8

12.5

0.0

0.0 4,797.4 1,491.6

350.0

285.9

9.7

6.6

52.5

42.9

470.0

128.0

882.2

463.4 2,770.0

682.8

254.0

11.8

0.0

0.0 3,906.2 1,158.0

350.0

340.0

13.0

11.6

52.5

51.0

399.7

115.0

815.2

517.6 2,279.7

560.7

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0 3,094.9 1,078.3

Managing  
Directors

Christophe 
Evain

Benoît 
Durteste

Philip 
Keller

non executive Director

Justin Dowley

Peter Gibbs

Kevin Parry

Kim Wahl

Lindsey McMurray

Jean-Daniel Camus

James Nelson

Total emoluments paid to all Directors £000

Notes to the single total figure table

2014

180.0

80.0

75.0

64.5

65.0

0

0

2014

3,216.5

fees  
£000

2013

155.0

75.0

70.0

40.0

31.6

16.6

16.6

2013

1,965.7

1  Each Managing Director receives medical insurance (taxable), life assurance (not taxable) and income protection (not taxable). Some Managing Directors also receive the benefit of 

a loan from the EBT.

2 This figure represents the cash element of the annual bonus that is not deferred.

3  This figure represents the sum of the face values of each of the following awards made for the year:

– Deferred Share Award (50% of annual bonus in excess of £100,000)

– PLC Equity Award

4  The long term incentive amounts are payments received through ICG payroll during the year from BSC and shadow carry. 

5  Individuals are invited to participate in Third Party Carry and must pay the fair market value for their partnership share in the Third Party Carry partnership, and therefore there is no 

remuneration value. The percentage of the total distributable Third Party Carry by fund awarded to the Managing Directors is shown below.

The following allocation of TPC was made in respect of the financial year.

Christophe Evain

Benoît Durteste

Philip Keller

% of Senior Debt Partners 
TPC points

8.11%

6.48%

5.41%

72 / 73

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportANNUAl RepORT ON ReMUNeRATION
continued

sInGLe totaL fIGUre of reMUneratIon taBLe (aUDIteD) continued
In the financial year under review, in line with the Directors’ remuneration policy, the base salary payable to each Managing Director has been 
increased to £350,000 per annum.

Managing Director

Christophe Evain

Philip Keller

Benoît Durteste

salaries and fees  
£000

Y/e 31 March
2014

Y/E 31 March
2013

350.0

350.0

350.0

340.0

340.0

285.9

%
change

+2.94

+2.94

N/A*

*Benoît Durteste was promoted to the Board during the year ending 31 March 2013 and consequently his annual salary for that year reflects the rates of salary both before and after 
his Board appointment.

perforManCe MeasUres anD tarGets (aUDIteD)
The central feature of the Remuneration Policy is the Annual Award Pool. All incentives are governed by an overall limit expressed in terms of 
cash profit. The table below includes the cost of incentives drawn from the Annual Award Pool for the financial year under review and the two 
previous years.

FY

2012

2013

2014

Cash profit 
£m

164.9

(10.7)

339.1

Annual Award  
Pool 
£m

Spend on 
incentives 
£m

49.5

(3.2)

101.7

29.5

22.1

50.2

The calculation of cash profit has been reviewed and as a result adjusted. A change has been made to ensure that the provision for and receipt 
of rolled up interest are treated consistently. We have clarified the definition of cash profit and applied this to all years for which the Annual 
Award Pool has been in operation.

The cumulative spend as a percentage of profit to date is 20.6%.

As discussed in the policy table, a Managing Director’s annual incentive award is governed by the size of the Annual Award Pool in addition to 
their individual performance as determined by the annual appraisal process. At the beginning of the financial year under review, the Company 
assigned each Managing Director a number of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) broadly in the areas of fundraising and growth, investment 
portfolios, operational and risk management measures, people and performance management and financial performance. 

The Board considers that the precise content of each of the Managing Directors’ KPIs is commercially sensitive (because they would provide 
information to our competitors who, typically, are not required to disclose similar details), and so they are not disclosed in this report and will  
not be disclosed in the future.

Deferred Share Awards are made in respect of 50% of any annual bonus in excess of £100,000. The vesting of these awards is subject to  
a continued service condition.

Payments from shadow carry arrangements were made to certain Managing Directors during the year which are included in the single total 
figure of remuneration on page 73. The hurdle rate of return (8%) in respect of the relevant vintage(s) has been met.

The split between variable elements of pay from the Annual Award Pool for the Managing Directors in 2013/14 was as follows:

Elements of variable pay 

PLC Equity

Balance Sheet Carry

Annual Cash Bonus 

Deferred Share Award

%

64

14

12

10

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014fees paID to non exeCUtIve DIreCtors (aUDIteD)
In the financial year under review, the fees paid to Non Executive Directors were as follows:

Non Executive Directors

Justin Dowley (Chairman)

Peter Gibbs

Kevin Parry

Lindsey McMurray

Kim Wahl

Board 
membership  
fees  
£000

Board and 
Committee 
Chairman  
fees 
£000

Senior 
Independent 
Director fee  
£000

Committee membership

Audit 
£000

Remuneration 
£000

–

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

175.0

20.0

10.0

–

–

–

–

5.0

–

–

–

5.0

–

5.0

4.5

5.0

–

5.0

5.0

5.0

sCheMe Interests aWarDeD DUrInG the fInanCIaL Year (aUDIteD)
Managing Directors were awarded the following share scheme interests during the financial year.

total  
for year  
ending  
2014 
£000

180.0

80.0

75.0

65.0

64.5

464.5

Total  
for year  
ending  
2013 
£000

155.0

75.0

70.0

31.6

40.0

371.6

Managing Director

Scheme interest awarded

Christophe Evain

Deferred  
Share Award

PLC Equity Award

Benoît Durteste

Deferred Share Award

PLC Equity Award

Basis on which award  
was made

Face value

Percentage of 
award for minimum 
performance

50% of any annual bonus 
in excess of £100,000 
is awarded in deferred 
shares

Result of Director’s annual 
appraisal

£47,500

100

£818,500

100

50% of any annual bonus 
in excess of £100,000 
is awarded in deferred 
shares

Result of Director’s annual 
appraisal

£28,000

100

£654,800

100

SAYE options

All employee by election

£9,000

Philip Keller

Deferred Share Award

PLC Equity Award

50% of any annual bonus 
in excess of £100,000 
is awarded in deferred 
shares

Result of Director’s annual 
appraisal.

£15,000

100

100

£545,700

100

End of period over which performance 
measures and targets must be achieved

The deferred shares normally vest one third 
in each of the first, second and third years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

PLC Equity awards normally vest one third 
in each of the third, fourth and fifth years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

The deferred shares normally vest one third 
in each of the first, second and third years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

PLC equity awards normally vest in one third 
in each of the third, fourth and fifth years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

No performance conditions

The deferred shares normally vest one third 
in each of the first, second and third years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

PLC Equity awards normally vest in one third 
in each of the third, fourth and fifth years 
following the year of grant. There are no 
further performance conditions

SAYE options

All employee by election

£9,000

100

No performance conditions

Notes

The share price on the date of award of PLC Equity was £4.56. This was the middle market quotation for the five dealing days prior to the 22 May 2013.

The share price on the date of grant of the SAYE options was £4.32. This was the average share price over six days as prescribed by the SAYE scheme rules. The option exercise 
price is £3.47, i.e. at a discount of 20% to the market value at the date of grant (as permitted by tax legislation).

74 / 75

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportANNUAl RepORT ON ReMUNeRATION
continued

The following awards of Balance Sheet Carry and Shadow Carry points were made in the financial year:

Christophe Evain

Benoît Durteste

Philip Keller

Balance Sheet Carry points

Shadow Carry points EF 2006

Shadow Carry points ICAP 08

Shadow Carry points RF 08

1.41%

1.41%

0.94%

–

1.6%

–

–

3.97%

–

1.49%

1.49%

1.00%

The percentages represent the individuals’ share of the total carry available.

Further details of these funds can be found on page 18.

No values have been attributed to carry points at the year end as their value will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying investments. 
Payments from Balance Sheet Carry and Shadow Carry Awards are disclosed in the single total figure of remuneration in the year in which they 
become due.

DIreCtors’ Interests In shares (aUDIteD)
At 31 March 2014, Directors held the following interests in shares of the Company:

Managing 
Director

Christophe Evain

Philip Keller

Benoît Durteste

Non Executive 
Directors

Justin Dowley

Peter Gibbs

Kevin Parry

Kim Wahl

Lindsey McMurray

Shareholding requirement

Proportion of 
annual salary

Number of  
shares

Shareholding 
requirement met?

Shares held 
outright

DSA, FMC Equity 
Award and PLC 
Equity Award 
interests

SAYE options 
subject to service 
condition

Share options 
subject to 
performance

Share options 
vested but 
unexercised

200%

200%

200%

158,569

158,569

127,919

Yes

Yes

Yes

703,847

306,970

165,279

2,326,392

1,547,102

671,447

4,945

2,593

2,593

108,650

45,158

90,399

285,069

181,439

67,840

119,639

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

73,982 options over shares in favour of Christophe Evain lapsed on 1 April 2014. Subsequently, DSA and PLC Equity Awards were made 
to Managing Directors on 20 May 2014 in respect of their prior year performance. A total of 793,487 interests over shares were awarded to 
Christophe Evain, a total of 520,538 interests over shares were awarded to Philip Keller and a total of 632,506 interests over shares were 
awarded to Benoît Durteste. Other than the lapsed and these awards, there were no changes in shareholdings between the year end and 
23 May 2014.

The share price at 31 March 2014 was £4.137 per share. The average option exercise price of vested but unexercised options is £5.133.

FMC Equity Awards are disclosed as the number of Company shares that the awards would convert into at 31 March 2014, based on the 
Company share price and the FMC share valuation as at that date.

No share options were exercised during the year. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014DIreCtors’ Co-InvestMent In thIrD partY fUnDs

The following amounts have also been invested by Managing Directors into third party funds operated by ICG:

Managing Director

Christophe Evain

Benoît Durteste

Philip Keller

EF 06

ICAP 08

IMP 08

RF 08

Fund V

€750,000

 $250,000 

€375,000

€150,000

€2,100,000

€350,000

€11,700

€2,250,000

€150,000

€500,000

sharehoLDer DILUtIon 
For all awards made during the 2010/11 financial year and subsequent financial years, the Company has and intends in the future to use market 
purchased shares to satisfy any equity settled incentive awards.

The Committee has set a dilution limit for FMC Equity Awards (the FMC Equity Pool) of 20% of the issued share capital of the FMC that may be 
made the subject of FMC Equity Awards. 

The Company established the Intermediate Capital Group plc 2002 Employee Benefit Trust which may be used to hold shares and cash in 
conjunction with employee incentive schemes established by the Company from time to time.

paYMents for Loss of offICe (aUDIteD)
No payments were made for loss of office in the financial year under review.

paYMents MaDe to past DIreCtors (aUDIteD)
In the financial year ended 31 March 2014, the following payments were made to former Directors in respect of Shadow TPC and the vesting of 
PLC Equity awarded while they were Managing Directors.

Paul Piper 

Andrew Phillips

Tom Attwood

Francois de Mitry

£122,220

£1,786,170

£516,189

£1,525,031

perforManCe Graph of totaL sharehoLDer retUrn
The graph below shows a comparison between the Company’s total shareholder return performance and the total shareholder return for all the 
financial services companies in the FTSE All Share index. The graph compares the value, at 31 March 2014, of £100 invested in Intermediate 
Capital Group plc on 31 March 2004 with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE All Share Financial Index over the subsequent ten years. 
This index has been chosen to give a comparison with the average returns that shareholders could have received by investing in a range  
of other major financial services companies.

£

200

150

100

50

0

31 Mar 04 31 Mar 05

31 Mar 06

31 Mar 07

31 Mar 08

31 Mar 09

31 Mar 10

31 Mar 11

31 Mar 12

31 Mar 13

31 Mar 14

Intermediate Capital Group

FTSE All Shares financials

Source: Bloomberg

76 / 77

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAl RepORT ON ReMUNeRATION
continued

totaL reMUneratIon of the ChIef exeCUtIve offICer
The table below details the total remuneration of the Director holding the position of Chief Executive Officer of Intermediate Capital Group plc 
for the past five years.

2014 Christophe Evain

2013 Christophe Evain

2012 Tom Attwood

2011 Tom Attwood

2010 Tom Attwood

Total  
remuneration 
£000

Percentage of maximum 
opportunity of short term 
incentives awarded

Percentage of maximum 
opportunity of long term 
incentives awarded

4,797

1,492

2,973

5,941

4,631

97%

24%

0%

29%

44%

20%

1%

100%

97%

100%

The long term incentive figures above for Tom Attwood include payments made under the Medium Term Incentive Scheme (MTIS), 
a compensation arrangement which has now closed.

perCentaGe ChanGe In reMUneratIon of DIreCtor UnDertaKInG 
the roLe of ChIef exeCUtIve
The table below details how changes to the CEO’s pay compare with the change in the average pay across all employees of the Group. 
Each figure is a percentage change of the values between the previous financial year and the financial year under review. The total permanent 
workforce has been selected as the comparator for salaries and fees and short term incentives. The comparison of the increase in taxable 
benefits has been made for UK permanent employees only as their remuneration packages are most similar to that of the Chief Executive.

Chief Executive Officer

All employees

Salaries and fees

Taxable benefits

Short term incentives

2.86%

3.37%

1.16%

(18.33%)

300%

65%

The larger year on year increase for the CEO compared to the total permanent workforce reflects the increased volatility in compensation of 
ICG’s most senior employees, as it most closely reflects the year on year variations in cash profit.

reLatIve IMportanCe of spenD on paY
The graph below illustrates the relative importance of spend on pay compared with other disbursements from profit (namely distributions to 
shareholders) for the financial year under review and the previous financial year. The current year shareholder distributions include a share 
buyback of up to £100m which the Group announced with its 2014 results.

£m

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

+131%
183.3

79.5

+17%
66.4

56.6

Shareholder 
distributions

Staff costs

2013

2014

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014stateMent of IMpLeMentatIon of reMUneratIon poLICY In foLLoWInG fInanCIaL Year

The proposed salaries for the Managing Directors for the 2014/15 financial year are set out below, together with the increase from the previous 
financial year.

Managing Director

Christophe Evain

Philip Keller

Benoît Durteste

Salaries and fees £000

Y/E 31 March 2015

Y/E 31 March 2014

% change

360.0

360.0

360.0

350.0

350.0

350.0

2.86

2.86

2.86

For 2014/15, the Annual Award Pool will be calculated as a percentage of cash profits which, over a period of five years, will not exceed 30% on 
average. The Annual Award Pool will be calculated as described in the Directors’ remuneration policy. All incentives (excluding TPC and similar 
arrangements in respect of business acquisitions or ICG direct investment funds that do not give rise to a cost or liability to the Group) payable 
to employees of the Group will be funded out of the Annual Award Pool. 

The Managing Directors’ annual bonus and other incentives will be dependent on them achieving the objectives set for them in the following areas: 

 – Fundraising and growth

 – Investment performance

 – Risk management measures

 – Financial performance

 – People and performance management

reMUneratIon CoMMIttee

CoMposItIon, reMIt anD operatIon

The Committee is authorised by the Board to determine and agree the framework for the remuneration of the Chairman of the Company, the 
Managing Directors and such other members of the executive management as it is instructed by the Board to consider and is also responsible 
for determining the total individual remuneration package of each Managing Director, having given due regard to the contents of the Code, 
as well as the Listing Rules. The Committee is responsible for determining targets for any performance related pay schemes operated by 
the Company as well as the policy for pension arrangements for each Managing Director. The Committee is responsible for the overall 
remuneration policy for all the Group’s staff and takes into account the requirement that the remuneration arrangements should:

 – Be consistent with and promote sound and effective risk management, and do not encourage excessive risk taking

 – Be in line with the strategic priorities, objectives, values and long term interests of the Group

 – Include measures to avoid conflict of interest 

 – Take into account the long term interests of shareholders, investors and other stakeholders 

 – Be formulated on the basis of advice from ICG Group’s compliance function, particularly in relation to performance measurement

The Committee comprises five independent Non Executive Directors: 

 – Peter Gibbs (Chairman)

 – Justin Dowley 

 – Lindsey McMurray 

 – Kevin Parry

 – Kim Wahl

None of the Committee members have any personal financial interests (other than as shareholders or investors in ICG funds), conflicts of 
interest arising from cross directorships or day to day involvement in running the business. The Company therefore considers that it complies 
with the Code recommendations regarding the composition of the Committee.

The Committee meets at least three times a year and more frequently if necessary. Managing Directors attend the meetings by invitation 
and the Committee consults the Managing Directors about its proposals and has access to professional advice from outside the Company. 
The Head of Human Resources also attends the meetings by invitation. No Director is involved in any decisions as to their own remuneration. 

A table showing the number of Committee meetings held during the year and the attendance record of individual Directors can be found in the 
Corporate Governance section on page 51.

78 / 79

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportANNUAl RepORT ON ReMUNeRATION
continued

aDvIsers to the CoMMIttee
PricewaterhouseCoopers has been appointed by the Committee and advises the management of ICG on remuneration issues. PwC also 
provides advice to the Committee on other HR issues on request. Advisers are selected on the basis of their expertise in the area and with a 
view to ensuring independence from other advisers to the Group. The Committee is therefore confident that independent and objective advice 
is received from their advisers.

Mayer Brown have been available to advise the Committee during the year to 31 March 2014. These advisers were appointed by the Company.

The fees charged for advice to the Committee were £67,600 (PwC). Fees are charged on the basis of time spent. The following topics were 
discussed and addressed as required:

Meetings

May

November

Topics addressed

Review and approval of compensation recommendations for FY12 and awards for FY13 taking into account 
advice from the Group’s compliance function in relation to performance measurement

Review of FMC valuation

Disclosure requirements

Review of EBT arrangements

Cash profit

Compensation market data

Directors’ remuneration report

SAYE Rules

Reviews of EBT arrangements

Review of AIFMD Regulation

FMC valuation

January

Review of emerging trends within remuneration regulation and governance

March 

Review of EBT arrangements

Review of bonus commitments 
Compensation market data

Approval of Remuneration Committee annual timetable

Directors’ remuneration report

ICG Remuneration Policy annual review

Review of Annual Award Pool

Directors’ remuneration report

AIFMD/CRD IV and other regulatory updates

Amendments to Omnibus and Balance Sheet Carry rules

SDP carried interest allocations

Review of EBT arrangements

UK Pension Policy

stateMent of votInG at GeneraL MeetInG
At the last Annual General Meeting, votes on the Remuneration report were cast as follows:

Votes for

Votes against

Abstentions

Reasons for votes 
against, if known

Approval of the Remuneration 
report for the financial year 
under review

256,414,351 
85.71%

42,738,065 
14.29%

652,943

Not specified

Actions taken by the Committee

The Committee Chairman offered 
to meet a range of shareholders to 
discuss their concerns

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014DIReCTORS’ RepORT

The Directors present their Annual Report and the audited financial 
statements for the 12 months ended 31 March 2014. The risks to which 
the Group is subject and the policies in respect of such risks are set out 
on pages 28 to 35 and are incorporated into this report by reference. 
The corporate governance statement, set out on pages 50 to 53, 
is incorporated into this report by reference.

prInCIpaL aCtIvItIes anD 
BUsIness revIeW

The principal activities of the Group and the 
review of the Group’s business (as required 
by section 417 of the Companies Act 2006) 
are set out in the Strategic Review on pages 
2 to 45, which are incorporated into this 
report by reference.

DIreCtors

The Directors who served during the year are 
each shown with a profile at pages 48 and 
49; those details are incorporated into this 
report by reference.

The composition of each of the Committees 
of the Board and the Chairman of each 
Committee are detailed in the report of each 
Committee, found at pages 54 to 80.

DIreCtors’ share optIons

Details of Directors’ share options are 
provided in the report of the Remuneration 
Committee on pages 62 to 80. Other than 
the interests of Benoît Durteste in 2,857 
shares of ICG FMC Limited which are 
included within the table on page 76, during 
the financial year ending 31 March 2014, 
the Directors had no interests in the shares 
of any subsidiary company. No Company 
shares were issued to Directors under the 
Executive Share Option Schemes during 
the year.

DIreCtors’ Interests

The Directors who held office at 31 March 2014 and their connected persons, as defined by 
the Companies Act, had the following interests in the ordinary shares of the Company:

Justin Dowley (Chairman)

Christophe Evain (CEO)

Philip Keller

Benoît Durteste

Peter Gibbs

Kevin Parry

Lindsey McMurray

Kim Wahl

31 March 2014 
number of 20p 
ordinary shares

31 March 2013  
Number of 20p  
ordinary shares

119,639

703,847

306,970

165,279

–

–

–

–

119,639

671,383

234,776

54,400

–

–

–

–

There have been no changes to the Directors’ interests in shares at 31 March 2014 as set out 
above as at 23 May 2014.

sIGnIfICant sharehoLDInGs

As at 19 May 2014 the Company had been notified or otherwise become aware of the 
following interests pursuant to the Disclosure Rules and the Transparency Rules representing 
3% or more of the issued share capital of the Company.

InstItUtIon

Schroders

Newton 

Threadneedle

BlackRock

Aviva

F&C 

Baillie Gifford

LSV

L&G

Norges

Number of shares

Percentage of 
voting rights

30,701,723

23,405,721

22,096,779

20,138,670

19,990,373

15,834,635

15,718,402

14,637,985

12,954,776

11,498,471

7.6

5.8

5.5

5.0

5.0

3.9

3.9

3.6

3.2

2.9

80 / 81

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ RepORT
continued

DIvIDenD

The Directors recommend a final net 
dividend payment in respect of the ordinary 
shares of the Company at a rate of 14.4p 
per share (2013: 13.7p), which when added 
to the interim net dividend of 6.6p per share 
(2013: 6.3p), gives a total net dividend for 
the year of 21.0p per share (2013: 20.0p). 
The amount of dividend paid in the year was 
£78.2m (2013: £74.9m).

aUDItor

A resolution for the reappointment of the 
current auditor, Deloitte LLP, will be proposed 
at the forthcoming AGM. Details of auditor’s 
remuneration for audit and non audit work 
are disclosed in note 9 to the accounts.

DIsCLosUre of InforMatIon to the 
aUDItor

Each of the persons who is a Director at the 
date of approval of this report confirms that:

1.  So far as the Director is aware, there is 

no relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware

2.  The Director has taken all reasonable 
steps that they ought to have taken as 
a Director in order to make themselves 
aware of any relevant audit information 
and to ensure that the Company’s auditor 
is aware of that information

This confirmation is given and should be 
interpreted in accordance with the provisions 
of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006.

post BaLanCe sheet events

Material events since the balance sheet 
date are described in note 31 and form 
part of the Directors’ report disclosures.

poLItICaL anD CharItaBLe 
ContrIBUtIons

No contributions were made during 
the current and prior year for political 
purposes. The charitable donations 
made by the Company are detailed 
at page 38, which forms part of the 
Directors’ report disclosures.

GreenhoUse Gas eMIssIons

All disclosures concerning the Group’s 
greenhouse emissions are detailed on 
page 38, which forms part of the Directors’ 
report disclosures.

DIreCtors’ InDeMnItY

The Company has entered into contractual 
indemnities with each of the Directors 
pursuant to the amendment to the 
Company’s Articles of Association 
authorised at the 2010 AGM and these 
remain in force. The Company also provides 
Directors’ and Officers’ insurance for 
the Directors.

aCqUIsItIon of shares BY eMpLoYee 
BenefIt trUst

Acquisition of shares by the Intermediate 
Capital Group Employee Benefit Trust 2002 
purchased during the year are as described 
in note 20 to the financial statements. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014share CapItaL anD rIGhts attaChInG 
to the CoMpanY’s shares

As at 31 March 2014 the issued share capital 
of the Company was 402,242,770 ordinary 
shares of 20p each. Certain key matters 
regarding the Company’s share capital are 
noted below:

 – Under the Company’s Articles of 

Association, any share in the Company 
may be issued with such rights or 
restrictions, whether in regard to dividend, 
voting, transfer, return of capital or 
otherwise as the Company may from time 
to time by ordinary resolution determine or, 
in the absence of any such determination, 
as the Board may determine. All shares 
currently in issue are ordinary shares of 
20p each carrying equal rights

 – At a general meeting of the Company 

every member present in person or by a 
duly appointed proxy has one vote on a 
show of hands and on a poll one vote for 
each share held

 – The Intermediate Capital Group Employee 
Benefit Trust 2002 holds shares which 
may be used to satisfy options and 
awards granted under the Company’s 
employee share schemes including its 
long term incentive plans. The voting 
rights of these shares are exercisable 
by the trustees in accordance with their 
fiduciary duties

 – The notice of any general meeting 

specifies deadlines for exercising voting 
rights either by proxy or present in person 
in relation to resolutions to be passed at 
a general meeting

 – No shareholder is, unless the Board 

decides otherwise, entitled to attend or 
vote either personally or by proxy at a 
general meeting or to exercise any other 
right conferred by being a shareholder if:

 – They or any person with an interest in 
shares has been sent a notice under 
section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 
(which confers upon public companies 
the power to require information 
with respect to interests in their 
voting shares)

 – They or any interested person has 
failed to supply the Company with 
the information requested within 14 
days where the shares subject to the 
notice (the “default shares”) represent 
at least 0.25% of their class or in any 
other case 28 days after delivery of 
the notice. Where the default shares 
represent 0.25% of their class, unless 
the Board decides otherwise, no 
dividend is payable in respect of those 
default shares and no transfer of any 
default shares shall be registered. 
These restrictions end seven days after 
receipt by the Company of a notice 
of an approved transfer of the shares 
or all the information required by the 
relevant section 793 notice, whichever 
is the earlier

 – The Directors may refuse to register any 
transfer of any share which is not a fully 
paid share, although such discretion 
may not be exercised in a way which 
the Financial Conduct Authority regards 
as preventing dealings in the shares of 
the relevant class or classes from taking 
place on an open and proper basis. 
The Directors may likewise refuse to 
register any transfer of a share in favour  
of more than four persons jointly

The Company is not aware of any other 
restrictions on the transfer of ordinary shares 
in the Company other than:

 – Certain restrictions that may from time to 
time be imposed by laws and regulations 
(for example, insider trading laws or the 
UK Takeover Code)

 – Pursuant to the Listing Rules of the 

Financial Conduct Authority whereby 
certain employees of the Company require 
approval of the Company to deal in the 
Company’s shares

The Company is not aware of any 
agreements between shareholders that 
may result in restrictions on the transfer of 
securities or voting rights. 

At the 2013 Annual General Meeting the 
Directors were given the power to allot 
shares and grant rights to subscribe for, or 
convert any security into, shares: up to an 
aggregate nominal amount of £26.8m and, 
in the case of a fully pre-emptive rights issue 
only, up to a total amount of £53.6m. 

A resolution will be proposed to renew 
the Company’s authority to allot further 
new shares at the forthcoming AGM. 
In accordance with the institutional guidelines 
issued by the Association of British Insurers 
(ABI), the proposed new authority will allow 
the Directors to allot ordinary shares equal 
to an amount of up to one third of the 
Company’s issued ordinary share capital 
as at 23 May 2014 plus, in the case of a 
fully pre-emptive rights issue only, a further 
amount of up to an additional one third of 
the Company’s issued share capital as at 
23 May 2014. The authority for Directors 
to allot shares in the Company’s shares 
is renewed annually and approval will 
be sought at the forthcoming AGM for 
its renewal.

The Director’s authority to effect purchases 
of the Company’s shares on the Company’s 
behalf is conferred by resolution of 
shareholders. At the 2013 AGM the 
Company was granted authority to purchase 
its own shares up to an aggregate value of 
approximately 10% of the issued ordinary 
share capital of the Company as at 22 May 
2013. The authority to effect purchases of the 
Company’s shares is renewed annually and 
approval will be sought at the forthcoming 
AGM for its renewal.

The Board aims to 
ensure that the Group’s 
business is always 
conducted with the 
long term interests of 
shareholders in mind.

82 / 83

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ RepORT
continued

powers of Directors

3.  £75m private placement arrangements 

Subject to its Articles of Association and 
relevant statutory law and to such direction 
as may be given by the Company by special 
resolution, the business of the Company is 
managed by the Board, who may exercise all 
powers of the Company whether relating to 
the management of the business or not. 

The Company’s Articles of Association 
give power to the Board to appoint 
Directors. The Articles also require any 
Directors appointed by the Board to submit 
themselves for election at the first AGM 
following their appointment and for one 
third of the Company’s Directors to retire by 
rotation at each AGM. Directors may resign 
or be removed by an ordinary resolution of 
shareholders. Notwithstanding the above, 
the Company has elected, in accordance 
with the UK Corporate Governance Code 
to have all Directors reappointed on an 
annual basis.

Change of control agreements

There are no significant agreements to which 
the Group is a party that take effect, alter or 
terminate upon a change of control of the 
Group, other than:

1.  The Private Placement arrangement 

totalling £75m dated between 28 June 
2004 and 28 February 2007 where 
a change of control gives rise to a 
downgrade in the credit rating and 
the loans are thereafter repayable 
on demand

2.  The Private Placement arrangement 

totalling £34m dated 26 June 2008 and 
the Private Placement arrangement 
totalling $150m dated 8 May 2013 where 
a change of control in the Company 
gives rise to an event of default under 
the agreements. The loans are thereafter 
repayable on demands

signed on 9 November 2011 under which 
a change of control triggers an immediate 
prepayment obligation of all outstanding 
principal, accrued interest and all other 
amounts due under the agreement, and 
a further private placement agreement for 
€11m agreed in November 2012 on the 
same terms

4.  Three bilateral loan facility agreements 
totalling £640m agreed in May and  
June 2012, two further bilateral loan 
facility agreements totalling £100m 
agreed in May 2013, a further bilateral 
loan facility agreement in respect of 
A$110m agreed in November 2013 and 
a further bilateral loan facility agreement 
in respect of A$50m agreed in February 
2014 where a change of control gives 
lenders the right, but not the obligation, 
to cancel their commitments to the 
facility and declare the loans repayable 
on demand

5.  The terms and conditions of the £35m 
retail bond issue which took place in 
December 2011 sets out that following 
a change of control event, investors 
have the right but not the obligation to 
sell their notes to ICG if the change of 
control results in either a credit ratings 
downgrade from investment grade to 
sub-investment grade, or a downgrade 
of one or more notches if already sub-
investment grade

6.  The terms and conditions of the £80m 
retail bond issue which took place in 
September 2012 sets out that following 
a change of control event, investors 
have the right but not the obligation to 
sell their notes to ICG if the change of 
control results in either a credit ratings 
downgrade from investment grade to 
non-investment grade, or a downgrade 
of one or more notches if already non-
investment grade

7.  The terms and conditions of the £50m 
wholesale bond issue which took place 
in March 2014 sets out that following 
a change of control event, investors 
have the right but not the obligation to 
sell their notes to ICG if the change of 
control results in either a credit ratings 
downgrade from investment grade to 
non investment grade, or a downgrade 
of one or more notches if already  
non investment grade

8.  The employee share schemes, details 
of which can be found in the Report of 
the Remuneration Committee on pages 
62 to 80, Awards and options under 
the 2001 Approved and Unapproved 
Executive Share Option Schemes and 
SAYE Plan 2004 become exercisable 
for a limited period following a change 
of control whereas awards under the 
KERSP will only become exercisable 
if the Remuneration Committee so 
decides. Awards and options under the 
Omnibus Plan and the BSC Plan vest 
immediately on a change of control

There are no agreements between the 
Group and its Directors or employees 
providing for compensation for loss of office 
or employment that occurs because of a 
takeover bid apart from (1) those described 
at 8 above and (2) the usual payment in lieu 
of notice.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014resULts of resoLUtIons proposeD at 2013 annUaL GeneraL MeetInG 

Resolution

Votes for

Votes against

Votes withheld

290,871,036

8,920,987

13,336

256,414,351

42,738,065

652,943

Receive the financial statements and reports of the Directors and auditors  
for the financial year ended 31 March 2013

Approve the Directors’ remuneration report for the financial year ended  
31 March 2013

Declare a final dividend of 13.7 pence per ordinary share for the financial year  
ended 31 March 2013

Reappoint Deloitte LLP as auditors of the Company to hold office as the Company’s 
auditors until the conclusion of the Company’s Annual General Meeting in 2014

Authorise the Directors to set the remuneration of the auditors

Appoint Kim Wahl as a Director

Appoint Lindsey McMurray as a Director.

Reappoint Justin Dowley as a Director

Reappoint Peter Gibbs as a Director

Reappoint Kevin Parry as a Director

Reappoint Christophe Evain as a Director

Reappoint Philip Keller as a Director

Reappoint Benoît Durteste as a Director

299,803,860

1,500

280,549,572

288,739,561

294,165,909

294,889,376

292,774,883

283,907,546

287,861,179

297,935,256

298,317,606

298,315,075

19,255,708

11,065,560

5,618,147

4,905,949

7,019,207

7,151,091

6,755,227

1,460,754

1,487,754

1,490,285

Grant the Directors authority to allot shares pursuant to section 551 of the Companies 
Act 2006

282,647,616

17,157,744

Subject to the passing of resolution 14, to authorise the directors to dis-apply  
pre-emption rights pursuant to sections 570 (1) and 573 of the Companies Act 2006

Authorise the Company to make market purchases of its ordinary shares pursuant  
to section 701 of the Companies Act 2006.

Approve that a general meeting of the Company (other than the annual general 
meeting) may be called on less than 14 clear days’ notice.

299,740,379

64,709

299,680,371

124,955

270,780,702

29,024,658

–

79

238

21,303

10,034

11,269

8,736,721

5,188,952

409,350

–

–

–

272

34

–

annual General Meeting 

The Annual General Meeting (AGM) of the Company will take place at the London office of the Company on 23 July 2014 at 11:00a.m. 
Details of the resolutions to be proposed at the AGM along with explanatory notes are set out in the circular to be posted to shareholders 
on 12 June 2014 convening the meeting.

84 / 85

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportDIReCTORS’ 
ReSpONSIbIlITIeS

ChrIstophe evaIn
Chief Executive Officer

phILIp KeLLer
Chief Financial Officer

Directors’ responsibilities statement 

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare financial statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the Directors 
are required to prepare the Group financial 
statements in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as 
adopted by the European Union (EU) and 
Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have also 
chosen to prepare the Parent Company 
financial statements under IFRS as adopted 
by the EU. Under company law the Directors 
must not approve the accounts unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Company 
and of the profit or loss of the Company 
for that period. In preparing these financial 
statements, IAS 1 requires that Directors:

 – Properly select and apply 

accounting policies

 – Present information, including accounting 

policies, in a manner that provides 
relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information

 – Provide additional disclosures when 

compliance with the specific requirements 
of IFRS are insufficient to enable users 
to understand the impact of particular 
transactions, other events and conditions 
or the entity’s financial position and 
financial performance

 – Make an assessment of the Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that 
are sufficient to show and explain the 
Company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial 
position of the Company and enable them to 
ensure that the financial statements comply 
with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of 
the Company and hence for taking 

reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate 
and financial information included on the 
Company’s website. Legislation in the United 
Kingdom governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

responsibility statement

We confirm that to the best of 
our knowledge:

 – The financial statements, prepared in 

accordance with IFRS as adopted by the 
European Union, give a true and fair view 
of the assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole

 – The management report, which is 

incorporated into the Directors’ report, 
includes a fair review of the development 
and performance of the business and 
the position of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and 
uncertainties that they face

 – The Directors consider that this Annual 

Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, 
is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s 
and the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy

By order of the Board

ChrIstophe evaIn
Chief Executive Officer
23 May 2014

phILIp KeLLer
Chief Financial Officer
23 May 2014

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014AUDITOR’S RepORT

Independent Auditor’s report to the members  
of Intermediate Capital Group plc.

opInIon on the parent CoMpanY 
fInanCIaL stateMents anD the GroUp 
fInanCIaL stateMents (“the fInanCIaL 
stateMents”) of InterMeDIate 
CapItaL GroUp pLC

In our opinion:

 – the financial statements give a true and fair 
view of the state of the group’s and of the 
parent company’s affairs as at 31 March 
2014 and of the group’s profit for the year 
then ended;

 – the group financial statements have 

been properly prepared in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union; 

 – the parent company financial statements 

have been properly prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by 
the European Union and as applied in 
accordance with the provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006; and

 – the financial statements have been 
prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 
2006 and, as regards the group financial 
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The financial statements comprise 
Consolidated Income Statement, 
Consolidated and Parent Company 
Statements of Comprehensive Income, 
Consolidated and Parent Company 
Statements of Financial Position, 
Consolidated and Parent Company 
Statements of Cash Flow and Consolidated 
and Parent Company Statements of 
Changes in Equity and the related notes 
1 to 31. The financial reporting framework 
that has been applied in their preparation is 
applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the 
European Union and, as regards the parent 
company financial statements, as applied 
in accordance with the provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006.

GoInG ConCern

As required by the Listing Rules we 
have reviewed the directors’ statement 
contained within the Corporate Governance 
Statements that the group is a going 
concern. We confirm that:

 – we have concluded that the directors’ use 
of the going concern basis of accounting 
in the preparation of the financial 
statements is appropriate; and

 – we have not identified any material 

uncertainties that may cast significant 
doubt on the group’s ability to continue as 
a going concern.

However, because not all future events or 
conditions can be predicted, this statement 
is not a guarantee as to the group’s ability to 
continue as a going concern.

86 / 87

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportAUDITOR’S RepORT
continued

oUr assessMent of rIsKs of MaterIaL MIsstateMent

The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had the greatest effect on our audit strategy, the allocation of 
resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team:

rIsK

vaLUatIon of UnqUoteD shares anD Warrants

hoW the sCope of oUr aUDIt responDeD to the rIsK

Valuing unquoted equities and warrants requires management to make a 
number of judgements, including valuation methodology and the discount 
or premium applied. Valuations can be sensitive to these judgments and 
inputs, so small changes in key assumptions can have a significant impact 
on carrying value and therefore reported results.

We assessed the Group’s valuation policy, management’s process 
and related controls for determining the valuations and that appropriate 
oversight from senior investment executives has been exercised within 
the valuations process;

We utilised fair value specialists to independently value and provide 
challenge to a sample of unquoted shares;

We challenged management assumptions used in determining the valuation 
of unquoted equities and warrants, including specifically changes to 
discount rates, comparable companies and valuation methodologies; and

We substantively tested key inputs into the valuations including discount 
factors and the extraction of management information. We also agreed the 
multiples used to independent sources.

IMpaIrMent of Loans anD InvestMents

hoW the sCope of oUr aUDIt responDeD to the rIsK

The identification of impairment events and the determination of the 
impairment charge require the application of judgment by management, 
in particular the timing and quantum of future cash flows.

We challenged management assumptions relating to the timing and 
recognition of the impairment event and the determination of the 
impairment charge. We reviewed the nature and timing of the impairment 
event to assess whether it occurred during the period. We assessed the 
rationale for the quantum of the impairment charge and recalculated the 
impairment charge.

We assessed completeness of impairments by reviewing independent 
information, such as current news stories, for potential impairment triggers 
for a sample of loans and investments. Where changes to repayment dates 
negatively impacted the carrying value of assets, we challenged 
management as to whether this indicated an impairment had occurred.

revenUe reCoGnItIon

hoW the sCope of oUr aUDIt responDeD to the rIsK

Determining the management fee income can be difficult due to the 
complexity of some of the calculations and because of the extent of manual 
input into the process. The accuracy and occurrence of interest income 
arising from instruments with estimated cash flows and repayment dates 
is a risk, as it is reliant on management judgment relating to the timing 
and quantum of future of cash flows. There is also a risk that all revenue 
is not complete.

We carried out substantive testing on management fees by recalculating 
the fees recorded with reference to the contractual arrangements and the 
assets under management per third party custodian reports. We assessed 
the completeness of management fee income by investigating whether 
revenue had been recognised for all funds managed by the group.

For interest income, we tested the integrity of the calculations and 
re-performed calculations for a sample of investments. We also performed 
analytical procedures and substantive testing around accuracy, 
completeness and occurrence of interest income.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014rIsK

aCCoUntInG treatMent for neW, restrUCtUreD or refInanCeD 
CoMpLex InvestMent InstrUMents

Investment agreements arising from new investments or from restructuring 
or refinancing may contain complex terms that are difficult to interpret and 
can impact the accounting treatment and the presentation of results.

the reCoGnItIon anD MeasUreMent of CorporatIon tax 
aCCrUaLs

The group owns and manages investments in a number of locations, 
including low tax jurisdictions. The recognition of gains and losses in 
relevant jurisdictions may be subject to challenge by tax authorities. 
The determination of the likely tax charge is therefore subject to 
management judgement.

hoW the sCope of oUr aUDIt responDeD to the rIsK

We reviewed significant new, restructured or refinanced investment 
instrument contracts for complex features, including embedded derivatives, 
and checked the appropriate application of accounting policies and 
accounting standards. We used specialists to provide input into the 
accounting treatment and interpretation of complex terms.

We reviewed a listing of terms that may constitute embedded derivatives, 
and performed procedures to assess whether they were required to 
be detached from the underlying instrument and recognised and 
valued separately. 

We assessed management’s process for identifying potential 
embedded derivatives, and reviewed their assumptions as to 
valuation judgments made.

hoW the sCope of oUr aUDIt responDeD to the rIsK

We engaged with tax specialists, who considered the appropriateness of 
managements’ corporation tax accrual estimates in light of the group’s 
overall business and commercial arrangements. We also reviewed 
correspondence with tax authorities and legal advice received.

The Audit Committee’s consideration of 
these risks is set out in the Audit Committee 
report on pages 54 to 59.

Our audit procedures relating to these 
matters were designed in the context of our 
audit of the financial statements as a whole, 
and not to express an opinion on individual 
accounts or disclosures. Our opinion on 
the financial statements is not modified with 
respect to any of the risks described above, 
and we do not express an opinion on these 
individual matters.

oUr appLICatIon of MaterIaLItY

We define materiality as the magnitude of 
misstatement in the financial statements 
that makes it probable that the economic 
decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable 
person would be changed or influenced. 
We use materiality both in planning the 
scope of our audit work and in evaluating 
the results of our work.

We determined materiality for the group to 
be £12 million, which is approximately 1% 
of equity, 10% of normalised pre-tax profit 
and less than 8% of pre-tax profit. We used 
normalised pre-tax profit to determine 
materiality to exclude the volatility arising 
from impairments and capital gains, which 
cause significant year on year fluctuations. 

We agreed with the Audit Committee 
that we would report to the Committee all 
audit differences in excess of £240,000, 
as well as differences below that threshold 
that, in our view, warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds. We also report to the 
Audit Committee on disclosure matters that 
we identified when assessing the overall 
presentation of the financial statements. 

88 / 89

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportAUDITOR’S RepORT
continued

an overvIeW of the sCope of oUr 
aUDIt

Our group audit was scoped by obtaining 
an understanding of the group and 
its environment, including group-wide 
controls, and assessing the risks of material 
misstatement at the group level. Based on 
that assessment, we focused our group 
audit scope on the audit work associated 
with four significant components subject 
to full scope audits for the year ended 
31 March 2014. The significant components 
were Intermediate Capital Group PLC, 
Intermediate Capital Investments Ltd, 
Intermediate Capital Managers Ltd and 
Intermediate Finance II PLC. Specified audit 
procedures were performed on another nine 
non-significant components, to address 
the risk of material misstatement in fee 
income. The extent of our testing was based 
on our assessment of the risks of material 
misstatement and of the materiality of the 
group’s operations within the components. 
The four full scope components listed 
above represent the most significant 
subsidiaries of the group, and account for 

approximately 98% of the group’s net assets 
and over 100% of the group’s profit before 
tax, as losses before tax were incurred in 
insignificant components. They were also 
selected to provide an appropriate basis for 
undertaking audit work to address the risks 
of material misstatement identified above. 
Our audit work at the components was 
executed at levels of materiality applicable 
to each individual entity which were lower 
than group materiality.

At the parent entity level we also tested 
the consolidation process and carried 
out analytical procedures to confirm our 
conclusion that there were no significant 
risks of material misstatement of the 
aggregated financial information of the 
remaining components not subject to audit 
or audit of specified account balances.

The group engagement team is responsible 
for auditing the significant components, so 
the teams are briefed as part of the group 
audit team briefings, and the documentation 
and findings is reviewed by the group 
engagement team. 

12

NET
ASSETS

1

PROFIT
BEFORE
TAX

1  Full audit scope 
2  Review at Group level 

98%
2%

1  Full audit scope 

100%

ICG ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
opInIon on other Matters 
presCrIBeD BY the CoMpanIes aCt 2006

our duty to read other information in the 
annual report

In our opinion:

 – the part of the Directors’ remuneration 
report to be audited has been properly 
prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006; and

 – the information given in the Strategic 

Under International Standards on Auditing 
(UK and Ireland), we are required to report 
to you if, in our opinion, information in the 
annual report is:

 – materially inconsistent with the information 

in the audited financial statements; or

report and the Directors’ report for the 
financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with 
the financial statements.

 – apparently materially incorrect based 
on, or materially inconsistent with, our 
knowledge of the group acquired in the 
course of performing our audit; or

Matters on WhICh We are reqUIreD 
to report BY exCeptIon

adequacy of explanations received and 
accounting records

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are 
required to report to you if, in our opinion:

 – we have not received all the information 

and explanations we require for our audit; 
or

 – adequate accounting records have not 
been kept by the parent company, or 
returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited 
by us; or

 – the parent company financial statements 
are not in agreement with the accounting 
records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of 
these matters.

Directors’ remuneration

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also 
required to report if in our opinion certain 
disclosures of directors’ remuneration have 
not been made or the part of the Directors’ 
remuneration report to be audited is not in 
agreement with the accounting records and 
returns. We have nothing to report arising 
from these matters.

Corporate Governance statement

Under the Listing Rules we are also 
required to review the part of the Corporate 
Governance Statement relating to the 
company’s compliance with nine provisions 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code. 
We have nothing to report arising from 
our review.

 – otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to 
consider whether we have identified any 
inconsistencies between our knowledge 
acquired during the audit and the 
directors’ statement that they consider 
the annual report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and whether the annual 
report appropriately discloses those 
matters that we communicated to the audit 
committee which we consider should have 
been disclosed. We confirm that we have 
not identified any such inconsistencies or 
misleading statements.

respeCtIve responsIBILItIes of 
DIreCtors anD aUDItor

As explained more fully in the Directors’ 
responsibilities statement, the directors 
are responsible for the preparation of 
the financial statements and for being 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view. 
Our responsibility is to audit and express 
an opinion on the financial statements 
in accordance with applicable law and 
International Standards on Auditing (UK 
and Ireland). Those standards require us to 
comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s 
Ethical Standards for Auditors. We also 
comply with International Standard on 
Quality Control 1 (UK and Ireland). Our audit 
methodology and tools aim to ensure that 
our quality control procedures are effective, 
understood and applied. Our quality 
controls and systems include our dedicated 
professional standards review team, 
strategically focused second partner reviews 
and independent partner reviews.

This report is made solely to the company’s 
members, as a body, in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken 
so that we might state to the company’s 
members those matters we are required 
to state to them in an Auditor’s report and 
for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or 
assume responsibility to anyone other than 
the company and the company’s members 
as a body, for our audit work, for this report, 
or for the opinions we have formed.

sCope of the aUDIt of the fInanCIaL 
stateMents

An audit involves obtaining evidence about 
the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements are 
free from material misstatement, whether 
caused by fraud or error. This includes an 
assessment of: whether the accounting 
policies are appropriate to the group’s 
and the parent company’s circumstances 
and have been consistently applied and 
adequately disclosed; the reasonableness 
of significant accounting estimates made by 
the directors; and the overall presentation of 
the financial statements. In addition, we read 
all the financial and non-financial information 
in the annual report to identify material 
inconsistencies with the audited financial 
statements and to identify any information 
that is apparently materially incorrect based 
on, or materially inconsistent with, the 
knowledge acquired by us in the course of 
performing the audit. If we become aware 
of any apparent material misstatements or 
inconsistencies we consider the implications 
for our report.

CaLUM thoMson
Senior statutory auditor
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor 
London, United Kingdom

90 / 91

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic reportICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014

Financial 
 statements

Contents

FInanCIal statements 

Consolidated income statement 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of comprehensive income 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of financial position 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of cash flow 

Consolidated and Parent Company  
statements of changes in equity 

Notes to the accounts 

93

94

95

96

97

99

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

Finance income 

Gains on investments 

Fee and other operating income 

Total revenue 

Finance costs 

Impairments 

Administrative expenses 

Profit before tax 

Tax expense 

Profit for the year  

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Non controlling interests 

Earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

All activities represent continuing operations. 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

Notes 

6 

7 

6 

8 

9 

11 

16 

13 

13 

2014 
£m 

199.4 

149.4 

85.8 

434.6 

(61.4) 

(112.4) 

(102.1) 

158.7 

(21.3) 

137.4 

137.2 

 0.2 

137.4 

2013
£m

218.6

73.0

78.8

370.4

(60.7)

(80.0)

(87.1)

142.6

(18.8)

123.8

124.4

(0.6)

123.8

35.7p 

32.1p

35.6p 

32.1p

92 / 93

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  
STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014  

Group  

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial assets: 

(Loss)/gains arising in the year 

Reclassification adjustment for gains recycled to profit 

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 

Tax credit/(charge) on items taken directly to or transferred from equity  

Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Non controlling interests 

Company 

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial assets: 

Gains arising in the year 

Reclassification adjustment for gains recycled to profit  

Notes

7

24

Tax credit/(charge) on items taken directly to or transferred from equity 

24

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

2014 
£m 

137.4 

(1.2) 

(125.7) 

(0.6) 

(127.5) 

30.8 

(96.7) 

40.7 

40.5 

0.2 

40.7 

2014 
£m 

145.2 

11.2 

(10.5) 

0.7 

0.1 

0.8 

2013
£m

123.8

67.1

(7.5)

1.2

60.8

(11.0)

49.8

173.6

174.2

(0.6)

173.6

2013
£m

97.8

4.9

–

4.9

(1.1)

3.8

146.0 

101.6

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  

STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014  

Group  

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial assets: 

(Loss)/gains arising in the year 

Reclassification adjustment for gains recycled to profit 

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 

Tax credit/(charge) on items taken directly to or transferred from equity  

Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Non controlling interests 

Company 

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial assets: 

Gains arising in the year 

Reclassification adjustment for gains recycled to profit  

Notes

7

24

2014 

£m 

137.4 

(1.2) 

(125.7) 

(0.6) 

(127.5) 

30.8 

(96.7) 

40.7 

40.5 

0.2 

40.7 

2014 

£m 

145.2 

11.2 

(10.5) 

0.7 

0.1 

0.8 

2013

£m

123.8

67.1

(7.5)

1.2

60.8

(11.0)

49.8

173.6

174.2

(0.6)

173.6

2013

£m

97.8

4.9

–

4.9

(1.1)

3.8

Tax credit/(charge) on items taken directly to or transferred from equity 

24

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

146.0 

101.6

CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
AS AT 31 MARCH 2014  

NON CURRENT ASSETS 
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment
Financial assets: loans, investments and warrants
Derivative financial assets 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Trade and other receivables 
Financial assets: loans and investments
Current tax debtor  
Derivative financial assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets 

EQUITY AND RESERVES 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Capital redemption reserve 
Own shares reserve 
Other reserves 
Retained earnings 

Notes

14
15
17
17

18
19

19

20

20

2014
Group
£m

5.7
4.9
2,080.8
5.8
2,097.2

73.3
115.8
1.5
12.8
164.8
368.2
2,465.4

80.4
672.4
1.4
(62.4) 
107.0
709.3

2013  
Group 
£m 

2014  
Company 
£m 

2013 
Company
£m

6.6 
4.6 
2,695.8 
14.7 
2,721.7 

53.9 
30.4 
0.7 
40.2 
52.5 
177.7 
2,899.4 

80.4 
671.7 
1.4 
(45.7) 
196.4 
659.0 

 – 
 3.7 
 1,470.5 
5.8 
1,480.0 

 469.5 
 115.8 
6.2 
12.8 
 70.5 
 674.8 
 2,154.8 

 80.4 
 672.4 
 1.4 
– 
 60.0 
 535.0 

–
3.9
1,942.9
14.7
1,961.5

453.6
30.4
0.5
40.2
17.0
541.7
2,503.2

80.4
671.7
1.4
–
52.4
468.0

Equity attributable to owners of the Company 

1,508.1

1,563.2 

 1,349.2 

1,273.9

Non controlling interest 

Total equity 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Provisions 
Financial liabilities 
Derivative financial liabilities 
Deferred tax liabilities 

CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Provisions 
Trade and other payables 
Financial liabilities 
Current tax creditor 
Derivative financial liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total equity and liabilities 

16

(0.1)

(0.3) 

– 

–

1,508.0

1,562.9 

1,349.2 

1,273.9

21
22

24

21
23
22

3.2
776.4
4.8
21.8
806.2

0.4
122.5
–
23.8
4.5
151.2
 957.4

 2,465.4

3.6 
688.9 
3.8 
53.1 
749.4 

0.4 
79.0 
472.4 
28.4 
6.9 
587.1 
1,336.5 

2,899.4 

 3.2 
 457.2 
 4.8 
 3.2 
 468.4 

 0.4 
 332.3 
 – 
 – 
 4.5 
 337.2 
 805.6 

 2,154.8 

3.6
416.2
3.8
8.3
431.9

0.4
317.7
472.4
–
6.9
797.4
1,229.3

2,503.2

Company Registration Number: 02234775. The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

These financial statements were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 23 May 2014 and were signed  
on its behalf by: 

JUSTIN DOWLEY  
Director 

PHILIP KELLER 
Director 

94 / 95

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOW 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

Operating activities 

Interest received 

Fees received  

Dividends received 

Interest paid 

Cash payments to suppliers and employees 

(Purchase)/realisation of current financial assets 

Purchase of loans and investments 

Recoveries on previously impaired assets 

Proceeds from sale of loans and investments – principal 

Proceeds from sale of loans and investments – gains on 
investments  

Cash generated from/(used in) operating activities 

Taxes paid 

Net cash generated from/(used in) operating activities 

Investing activities 

Cash flow on behalf of subsidiary undertakings 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Net cash used in investing activities 

Financing activities 

Dividends paid 

(Decrease)/increase in long term borrowings 

Cash inflow/(outflow) from derivative contracts 

Net purchase of own shares 

Capital contributions from non controlling interests 

Proceeds on issue of shares 

Net cash (used in)/generated from financing activities 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Effect of foreign exchange rate changes 

Net cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

Presented on the statements of financial position as: 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank overdraft 

Net cash and cash equivalents  

(512.1) 

(260.6) 

Notes

2014
Group 
£m

 277.1

 80.3

 25.2

(37.8) 

(92.7) 

(81.4) 

 0.8

 763.8

144.8

 568.0

(28.1) 

 539.9

–

(2.7) 

(2.7) 

(78.2) 

(383.1) 

 80.6

(27.1) 

– 

 0.7

(407.1) 

130.1

41.8

(7.1)

164.8

 164.8

–

 164.8

15

12

22

2013  
Group  
£m

2014  
Company  
£m 

2013 
Company 
£m

92.0

77.9

4.3

(59.0) 

(101.6) 

18.7

0.8

128.8

14.3

(84.4) 

(45.4) 

(129.8) 

 209.6 

 22.2 

 122.4 

(33.7) 

(75.9) 

(82.1) 

(163.3) 

 0.5 

 573.9 

14.3 

 587.9 

(25.4) 

 562.5 

–

(1.3) 

(1.3) 

(86.8) 

(2.2) 

(89.0) 

(74.9) 

163.9

(53.8) 

(13.3) 

0.1

2.3

24.3

(106.8) 

149.8

(1.2) 

41.8

52.5

(10.7) 

41.8

(78.2) 

(407.6) 

 80.6 

– 

– 

 0.7 

(404.5) 

69.0 

6.3 

(4.8) 

70.5 

70.5 

– 

 70.5 

70.2

8.9

85.6

(51.5)

(85.7)

(28.4)

(161.2)

0.8

109.0

1.2

(51.1)

(43.3)

(94.4)

(66.9)

(0.8)

(67.7)

(74.9)

291.2

(53.8)

–

–

2.3

164.8

2.7

3.7

(0.1)

6.3

17.0

(10.7)

6.3

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOW 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  
STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

Group 

Share 
capital
£m

Share 
premium 
£m 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve
£m

Share 
based 
payments 
reserve
£m

Available 
for sale 
reserve
£m

Own 
shares
£m

Retained 
earnings 
£m 

Non 
controlling 
interest 
£m 

Total 
£m 

Total 
equity
£m

Balance at 1 April 2013  

80.4

671.7 

1.4

46.6

149.8

(45.7)

659.0  1,563.2 

(0.3)  1,562.9

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial 
assets  

Exchange differences on 
translation of foreign 
operations  

Tax on items taken directly to 
or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year 

Own shares acquired in the 
year 

Options/awards exercised 

Credit for equity settled share 
schemes 

Dividends paid  

–

–

–

–

–

–

 –

–

–

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.7 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(126.9)

(0.1)

–

–

30.8

(0.1)

(96.1)

–

–

–

–

–

137.2 

137.2 

0.2 

137.4

– 

(126.9) 

– 

(126.9)

(0.5) 

(0.6) 

– 

30.8 

– 

– 

(0.6)

30.8

136.7 

40.5 

0.2 

40.7

–

(10.5)

17.3

–

–

–

–

–

(35.4)

18.7

– 

(35.4) 

(8.2) 

0.7 

–

–

– 

17.3 

(78.2) 

(78.2) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(35.4)

0.7

17.3

(78.2)

Balance at 31 March 2014  

80.4

672.4 

1.4

53.3

53.7

(62.4)

709.3  1,508.1 

(0.1)  1,508.0

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£m

Share based 
payments 
reserve
£m

Available  
for sale  
reserve 
£m 

1.4

44.4

Company 

Balance at 1 April 2013 

Profit for the year  

Available for sale financial assets 

Tax on items taken directly to  
or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income for the year

Options/awards exercised 

Credit for equity settled share schemes 

Dividends paid  

Share  
capital 
£m 

80.4 

Share 
premium
£m

671.7

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

0.7

–

–

Balance at 31 March 2014 

80.4 

672.4

1.4

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(10.5)

17.3

–

51.2

Retained 
earnings 
£m 

 468.0 

 145.2 

– 

– 

Total 
equity
£m

1,273.9

145.2

0.7

0.1

 145.2 

146.0

– 

– 

(78.2) 

(9.8)

17.3

(78.2)

8.0 

– 

0.7 

0.1 

0.8 

– 

– 

– 

8.8 

 535.0 

1,349.2

96 / 97

Operating activities 

Interest received 

Fees received  

Dividends received 

Interest paid 

Cash payments to suppliers and employees 

(Purchase)/realisation of current financial assets 

Purchase of loans and investments 

Recoveries on previously impaired assets 

Proceeds from sale of loans and investments – principal 

Proceeds from sale of loans and investments – gains on 

Cash generated from/(used in) operating activities 

investments  

Taxes paid 

Net cash generated from/(used in) operating activities 

Investing activities 

Cash flow on behalf of subsidiary undertakings 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Net cash used in investing activities 

Financing activities 

Dividends paid 

(Decrease)/increase in long term borrowings 

Cash inflow/(outflow) from derivative contracts 

Net purchase of own shares 

Capital contributions from non controlling interests 

Proceeds on issue of shares 

Net cash (used in)/generated from financing activities 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Effect of foreign exchange rate changes 

Net cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

Presented on the statements of financial position as: 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank overdraft 

Net cash and cash equivalents  

(512.1) 

(260.6) 

Notes

2013  

Group  

£m

2014  

Company  

£m 

2013 

Company 

£m

2014

Group 

£m

 277.1

 80.3

 25.2

(37.8) 

(92.7) 

(81.4) 

 0.8

 763.8

144.8

 568.0

(28.1) 

 539.9

–

(2.7) 

(2.7) 

(78.2) 

(383.1) 

 80.6

(27.1) 

– 

 0.7

(407.1) 

130.1

41.8

(7.1)

164.8

 164.8

–

 164.8

15

12

22

–

(1.3) 

(1.3) 

(86.8) 

(2.2) 

(89.0) 

92.0

77.9

4.3

(59.0) 

(101.6) 

18.7

0.8

128.8

14.3

(84.4) 

(45.4) 

(129.8) 

(74.9) 

163.9

(53.8) 

(13.3) 

0.1

2.3

24.3

(106.8) 

149.8

(1.2) 

41.8

52.5

(10.7) 

41.8

 209.6 

 22.2 

 122.4 

(33.7) 

(75.9) 

(82.1) 

(163.3) 

 0.5 

 573.9 

14.3 

 587.9 

(25.4) 

 562.5 

(78.2) 

(407.6) 

 80.6 

– 

– 

 0.7 

(404.5) 

69.0 

6.3 

(4.8) 

70.5 

70.5 

– 

 70.5 

70.2

8.9

85.6

(51.5)

(85.7)

(28.4)

(161.2)

0.8

109.0

1.2

(51.1)

(43.3)

(94.4)

(66.9)

(0.8)

(67.7)

(74.9)

291.2

(53.8)

–

–

2.3

164.8

2.7

3.7

(0.1)

6.3

17.0

(10.7)

6.3

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements. 

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  
STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

Group 

Share 
capital
£m

Share 
premium 
£m 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£m 

Share 
based 
payments 
reserve
£m

Available 
for sale 
reserve
£m

Own 
shares
£m

Retained 
earnings
£m

Non 
controlling 
interest 
£m 

Total 
£m 

Total 
equity
£m

Balance at 1 April 2012  

80.0

668.0 

1.4 

24.7

101.2

(33.0)

608.3

1,450.6 

0.1  1,450.7

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial 
assets 

Exchange differences on 
translation of foreign 
operations  

Tax on items taken directly to 
or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year 

Own shares acquired in the 
year 

–

–

–

–

–

–

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Options/awards exercised 

0.4

3.7 

Capital contribution 

Credit for equity settled  
share schemes 

Dividends paid  

–

–

–

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

(0.9)

–

22.8

–

–

59.6

–

(11.0)

48.6

–

–

–

–

–

124.4

124.4 

(0.6) 

123.8

–

59.6 

– 

59.6

1.2

1.2 

–

(11.0) 

– 

– 

1.2

(11.0)

125.6

174.2 

(0.6) 

173.6

–

–

–

–

–

(13.3)

0.6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(13.3) 

3.8 

– 

22.8 

(74.9)

(74.9) 

– 

– 

0.2 

– 

– 

(13.3)

3.8

0.2

22.8

(74.9)

Balance at 31 March 2013  

80.4

671.7 

1.4 

46.6

149.8

(45.7)

659.0

1,563.2 

(0.3)  1,562.9

Company 

Balance at 1 April 2012 

Profit for the year  

Available for sale financial assets 

Tax on items taken directly to  
or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income for the year

Options/awards exercised 

Credit for equity settled share schemes 

Dividends paid  

Share 
capital
£m

80.0

Share 
premium
£m

668.0

–

–

–

–

0.4

–

–

–

–

–

–

3.7

–

–

Capital 
redemption 
reserve
£m

Share based 
payments 
reserve
£m

Available  
for sale  
reserve 
£m 

1.4

23.5

Retained 
earnings 
£m 

Total 
equity
£m

445.1 

1,222.2

97.8 

– 

– 

97.8 

– 

– 

(74.9) 

97.8

4.9 

(1.1)

101.6

3.2

21.8

(74.9)

4.2 

– 

4.9 

(1.1) 

3.8 

– 

– 

– 

8.0 

468.0 

1,273.9

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(0.9)

21.8

–

44.4

Balance at 31 March 2013 

80.4

671.7

1.4

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
continued 

Group 

Capital 

Share 

based 

Share 

capital

£m

Share 

redemption 

payments 

premium 

reserve 

reserve

£m 

£m 

1.4 

£m

24.7

Available 

for sale 

reserve

£m

Own 

shares

£m

Retained 

earnings

£m

Non 

controlling 

interest 

£m 

Total 

£m 

Total 

equity

£m

Options/awards exercised 

0.4

3.7 

(0.9)

Profit for the year 

Available for sale financial 

assets 

Exchange differences on 

translation of foreign 

operations  

Tax on items taken directly to 

or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income 

for the year 

Own shares acquired in the 

year 

Capital contribution 

Credit for equity settled  

share schemes 

Dividends paid  

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Company 

Balance at 1 April 2012 

Profit for the year  

Available for sale financial assets 

Tax on items taken directly to  

or transferred from equity 

Total comprehensive income for the year

Credit for equity settled share schemes 

Dividends paid  

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

22.8

–

–

–

–

–

–

(11.0)

48.6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1.2

1.2 

–

(11.0) 

125.6

174.2 

(0.6) 

173.6

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.2 

1.2

(11.0)

(13.3)

3.8

0.2

22.8

(74.9)

Total 

equity

£m

97.8

4.9 

(1.1)

101.6

3.2

21.8

(74.9)

(13.3)

0.6

–

–

–

–

(13.3) 

3.8 

– 

22.8 

(74.9)

(74.9) 

Available  

for sale  

reserve 

£m 

4.2 

– 

4.9 

(1.1) 

3.8 

– 

– 

– 

Retained 

earnings 

£m 

97.8 

– 

– 

– 

– 

97.8 

(74.9) 

–

–

–

–

–

(0.9)

21.8

Share 

capital

£m

80.0

Capital 

Share based 

Share 

redemption 

premium

£m

668.0

reserve

£m

1.4

payments 

reserve

£m

23.5

445.1 

1,222.2

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

Balance at 31 March 2013  

80.4

671.7 

1.4 

46.6

149.8

(45.7)

659.0

1,563.2 

(0.3)  1,562.9

Options/awards exercised 

0.4

3.7

Balance at 31 March 2013 

80.4

671.7

1.4

44.4

8.0 

468.0 

1,273.9

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

CONSOLIDATED AND PARENT COMPANY  

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014  

Balance at 1 April 2012  

80.0

668.0 

101.2

(33.0)

608.3

1,450.6 

0.1  1,450.7

The nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are detailed in the Directors’ report. 

124.4

124.4 

(0.6) 

123.8

59.6

–

59.6 

– 

59.6

At the date of signing of these financial statements, certain new standards and interpretations have been issued but are not yet effective 
and have not been early adopted by the Group. The Directors are in the process of assessing the impact of the forthcoming standards 
on the operations of the Group. 

1. GENERAL INFORMATION 
Intermediate Capital Group plc is incorporated in the United Kingdom with Company registration number 02234775. The registered 
office is Juxon House, 100 St Paul’s Churchyard, London EC4M 8BU. 

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL REPORTING STANDARDS (IAS/IFRS) 

IFRS 10 

IFRS 11 

IFRS 12 

IAS 27 

IAS 28 

IFRS 9  

Consolidated Financial Statements 

Joint Arrangements 

Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities 

Separate Financial Statements (Amendments)  

Investments in Associate and Joint Ventures (Amendments) 

Financial Instruments: Classification and Measurement and 
Additions to Financial Liability Accounting 

Accounting periods commencing on or after

1 January 2014

1 January 2014

1 January 2014

1 January 2014

1 January 2014

1 January 2015

Management are well advanced in their assessment of the impact of IFRS 10, which redefines the principle of control and the 
requirements for consolidation. The Group adopted IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’ in the current financial year. 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

BASIS OF PREPARATION 

The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted for use 
in the European Union and in compliance with Article 4 of the EU IAS Regulation. 

The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for derivative financial instruments and non 
derivative financial instruments valued at fair value through profit or loss and available for sale financial assets, valued at fair value 
through equity. 

The functional and presentational currency of the Group and Company is Sterling. 

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these consolidated financial 
statements, except for the disclosure of fair measurements of financial liabilities, which was revised following the adoption of IFRS 13. 

GOING CONCERN 

The Directors have, at the time of approving the financial statements, a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Therefore they continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of preparing the financial accounts. 

The Directors have made this assessment in light of the £678.3m cash and unutilised debt facilities following a period of high 
realisations, no significant bank facilities maturing until 2016, and after reviewing the Group’s latest forecasts for a period of two years 
from year end. 

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in 
the Strategic Review on pages 2 to 45. This includes on pages 22 to 27 the Financial Review detailing the financial position of the 
Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities. In addition, note 3 to the financial statements includes the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments 
and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk. 

The Directors believe that the Group and Company are well placed to manage their business risks successfully in the current economic 
environment. 

The Directors continually monitor the debt profile of the Group and Company, and seek to refinance senior facilities a substantial period 
before they mature. The Group and Company have no facilities due to mature within the next 12 months. 

98 / 99

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014  
continued 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION 

The Group’s financial statements consolidate the results of Intermediate Capital Group plc and entities controlled by the Company. 

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Company has the power, directly or indirectly, to control the financial and operating policies. 
Subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control 
ceases. 

Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. The acquisition method involves the recognition of all assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired business at their fair value at the acquisition date. 

Adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to ensure consistency with the accounting policies of the Group. 
All intra-group transactions, balances, unrealised income and expenses are eliminated. An associate is an entity over which the Group 
has significant influence, but not control, over the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity. A joint venture is an entity over 
which the Group shares the power to control the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity. Associates and joint ventures are 
classified as fair value through profit or loss and measured in accordance with IAS 39. 

Employee Benefit Trust 

The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) acts as a special purpose vehicle, with the purpose of purchasing and holding shares of the Company 
for the hedging of future liabilities arising as a result of the employee share based compensation scheme. The EBT is consolidated into 
the Group’s financial statements. 

Own shares held 

Shares of the Company acquired by the EBT for the purpose of hedging share based payment transactions are recognised and held  
at cost in the reserve for own shares. No gain or loss is recognised on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Company’s  
own shares. 

INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES 

Investments in subsidiaries in the Parent Company Statement of Financial Position are recorded at cost less provision for impairments. 

INCOME RECOGNITION 

Finance income includes interest income and dividend income. Interest income on financial assets held at amortised cost is measured 
using the effective interest rate method. 

Dividend income is recognised in the income statement when the Group’s right to receive income is established. 

Fair value movements on financial assets comprise gains on disposal of available for sale financial assets and fair value gains on financial 
assets at fair value through profit or loss. Both are recognised as incurred. 

Fund Management fees and commissions are recognised in the income statement when the related service has been performed. 

The Group receives carried interest from the third party funds it manages once those funds exceed a performance target. Carried 
interest income is recognised only when all performance conditions have been met. 

FINANCE COSTS 

Finance costs comprise interest expense on financial liabilities, fair values losses on derivatives and net foreign exchange losses. 

Interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost is measured using the effective interest rate method, as outlined on 
page 104. The expected life of the liability is based upon the maturity date. 

Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognised in the income statement as incurred. 

OPERATING LEASES 

Operating lease payments, net of lease incentives, are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight line basis over 
the lease term. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014  

continued 

BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION 

ceases. 

The Group’s financial statements consolidate the results of Intermediate Capital Group plc and entities controlled by the Company. 

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Company has the power, directly or indirectly, to control the financial and operating policies. 

Subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control 

Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. The acquisition method involves the recognition of all assets, 

liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired business at their fair value at the acquisition date. 

Adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to ensure consistency with the accounting policies of the Group. 

All intra-group transactions, balances, unrealised income and expenses are eliminated. An associate is an entity over which the Group 

has significant influence, but not control, over the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity. A joint venture is an entity over 

which the Group shares the power to control the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity. Associates and joint ventures are 

classified as fair value through profit or loss and measured in accordance with IAS 39. 

The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) acts as a special purpose vehicle, with the purpose of purchasing and holding shares of the Company 

for the hedging of future liabilities arising as a result of the employee share based compensation scheme. The EBT is consolidated into 

Employee Benefit Trust 

the Group’s financial statements. 

Own shares held 

own shares. 

INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES 

INCOME RECOGNITION 

using the effective interest rate method. 

Shares of the Company acquired by the EBT for the purpose of hedging share based payment transactions are recognised and held  

at cost in the reserve for own shares. No gain or loss is recognised on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Company’s  

Investments in subsidiaries in the Parent Company Statement of Financial Position are recorded at cost less provision for impairments. 

Finance income includes interest income and dividend income. Interest income on financial assets held at amortised cost is measured 

Dividend income is recognised in the income statement when the Group’s right to receive income is established. 

Fair value movements on financial assets comprise gains on disposal of available for sale financial assets and fair value gains on financial 

assets at fair value through profit or loss. Both are recognised as incurred. 

Fund Management fees and commissions are recognised in the income statement when the related service has been performed. 

The Group receives carried interest from the third party funds it manages once those funds exceed a performance target. Carried 

interest income is recognised only when all performance conditions have been met. 

FINANCE COSTS 

OPERATING LEASES 

the lease term. 

Interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost is measured using the effective interest rate method, as outlined on 

page 104. The expected life of the liability is based upon the maturity date. 

Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognised in the income statement as incurred. 

Operating lease payments, net of lease incentives, are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight line basis over 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

EMPLOYEES BENEFITS 

Contributions to the Group’s defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the income statement as incurred. 

The Group issues compensation to its employees under equity settled share based payment plans. Equity settled share based 
payments are measured at the fair value of the awards at grant date. The fair value includes the effect of non market based vesting 
conditions. The fair value determined at the date of grant is expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period. At each balance 
sheet date, the Group revises its estimate of the number of equity instruments expected to vest as a result of non market based vesting 
conditions. The impact of the revision of the original estimates, if any, is recognised in the income statement with a corresponding 
adjustment to equity. 

TAXATION 

Tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. 

Current tax 

Current tax assets and liabilities comprise those obligations to, or claims from, fiscal authorities relating to the current or prior reporting 
period, that are unpaid at the balance sheet date. 

Deferred tax 

Deferred tax is provided in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities and their tax bases. 
Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary differences. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is 
probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the deferred tax assets can be utilised. 

Deferred tax is not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition of 
other assets and liabilities in a transaction, other than a business combination, that affects neither the tax nor the accounting profit. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated at the tax rates that are expected to be applied to their respective period of realisation, 
provided they are enacted or substantially enacted at the balance sheet date. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right of set off, when they relate to income taxes levied  
by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle on a net basis. 

Changes in deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised as a component of tax expense in the income statement, except where 
they relate to items that are charged or credited directly to equity, in which case the related deferred tax is also charged or credited 
directly to equity. 

FOREIGN CURRENCIES 

Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are translated using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the transactions. 
At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are retranslated at the rates prevailing 
at the balance sheet date. Non monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies that are measured at fair value are 
translated at the rate prevailing at the date the fair value was determined. Non monetary items that are measured at historical cost are 
translated using rates prevailing at the date of the transaction. 

The assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign operations are translated using the exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. 
Income and expense items are translated using the average exchange rates during the year. Exchange differences arising from the 
translation of foreign operations are taken directly to the translation reserve. 

Finance costs comprise interest expense on financial liabilities, fair values losses on derivatives and net foreign exchange losses. 

FINANCIAL ASSETS 

Financial assets are classified into the following categories, as determined on initial recognition: 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss include held for trading derivative financial instruments and debt and equity 
instruments designated as fair value through profit or loss. 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognised and subsequently measured at fair value on a recurring basis 
with gains or losses arising from changes in fair value recognised in the income statement. 

100 / 101

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

FINANCIAL ASSETS CONTINUED 

Loans and receivables 

Loans and receivables are held at amortised cost. They are non derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 
are not quoted in an active market. They include loans made as part of the Group’s operating activities as well as trade and other 
receivables and cash and cash equivalents. 

Loans and receivables are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and subsequently valued 
at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The carrying value of loans and receivables is considered a reasonable 
approximation of fair value. 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and short term bank deposits with an original maturity of three months or less. 

Available For Sale (AFS) 

AFS financial assets are financial assets not classified elsewhere and include listed bonds and listed and unlisted equity instruments. 

AFS financial assets are initially recognised at fair value. They are subsequently measured at fair value on a recurring basis with gains 
and losses arising from changes in fair value included as a separate component of equity until its sale or impairment, at which time the 
cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity is recognised in the income statement. 

IMPAIRMENT OF FINANCIAL ASSETS 

With the exception of financial assets classified as fair value through profit or loss, the Group assesses whether there is objective 
evidence that financial assets may be impaired at each balance sheet date. A financial asset is impaired when objective evidence 
indicates that a loss event has occurred after the initial recognition of the asset and that the loss event has an impact on the estimated 
future flows. 

For an investment in an equity instrument held as an AFS financial asset, a significant or prolonged decline in its fair value below cost is 
considered objective evidence of impairment. 

If an impairment event has occurred, the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the 
present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. 

Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement. If the impairment relates to AFS financial assets, the loss is recycled from 
equity to the income statement. 

With the exception of AFS assets if, in a subsequent period, the amount of impairment loss decreases and the decrease can be related 
objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed through 
the income statement to the extent that the carrying value of the investment at the date the impairment is reversed does not exceed 
what the amortised cost would have been had the impairment not been recognised. 

In respect of AFS financial assets, impairment losses previously recognised in the income statement are not reversed through the 
income statement. Any increase in value, subsequent to an impairment loss, is recognised in other comprehensive income. 

OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS 

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when the Group has a legal 
right to offset the amounts and intends to either settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

FINANCIAL ASSETS HELD FOR SALE 

The Group classifies non current financial assets that are expected to be recovered primarily from sale as held for sale. Non current 
assets held for sale are initially recognised at cost, and subsequently measured at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value less 
costs to sell. 

FINANCIAL LIABILITIES 

All financial liabilities, with the exception of derivatives, are initially recognised at fair value net of transaction costs and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Derivative liabilities are categorised as fair value through profit 
or loss. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

FINANCIAL ASSETS CONTINUED 

Loans and receivables 

Loans and receivables are held at amortised cost. They are non derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 

are not quoted in an active market. They include loans made as part of the Group’s operating activities as well as trade and other 

receivables and cash and cash equivalents. 

Loans and receivables are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and subsequently valued 

at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The carrying value of loans and receivables is considered a reasonable 

approximation of fair value. 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Available For Sale (AFS) 

AFS financial assets are financial assets not classified elsewhere and include listed bonds and listed and unlisted equity instruments. 

AFS financial assets are initially recognised at fair value. They are subsequently measured at fair value on a recurring basis with gains 

and losses arising from changes in fair value included as a separate component of equity until its sale or impairment, at which time the 

cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity is recognised in the income statement. 

IMPAIRMENT OF FINANCIAL ASSETS 

With the exception of financial assets classified as fair value through profit or loss, the Group assesses whether there is objective 

evidence that financial assets may be impaired at each balance sheet date. A financial asset is impaired when objective evidence 

indicates that a loss event has occurred after the initial recognition of the asset and that the loss event has an impact on the estimated 

future flows. 

For an investment in an equity instrument held as an AFS financial asset, a significant or prolonged decline in its fair value below cost is 

considered objective evidence of impairment. 

present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. 

Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement. If the impairment relates to AFS financial assets, the loss is recycled from 

equity to the income statement. 

With the exception of AFS assets if, in a subsequent period, the amount of impairment loss decreases and the decrease can be related 

objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed through 

the income statement to the extent that the carrying value of the investment at the date the impairment is reversed does not exceed 

what the amortised cost would have been had the impairment not been recognised. 

In respect of AFS financial assets, impairment losses previously recognised in the income statement are not reversed through the 

income statement. Any increase in value, subsequent to an impairment loss, is recognised in other comprehensive income. 

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when the Group has a legal 

right to offset the amounts and intends to either settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

The Group classifies non current financial assets that are expected to be recovered primarily from sale as held for sale. Non current 

assets held for sale are initially recognised at cost, and subsequently measured at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value less 

OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS 

FINANCIAL ASSETS HELD FOR SALE 

costs to sell. 

FINANCIAL LIABILITIES 

or loss. 

All financial liabilities, with the exception of derivatives, are initially recognised at fair value net of transaction costs and subsequently 

measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Derivative liabilities are categorised as fair value through profit 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and short term bank deposits with an original maturity of three months or less. 

Other intangible assets 

DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS FOR HEDGE ACCOUNTING 

The Group holds derivative financial instruments to hedge foreign currency and interest rate exposures. Derivatives, including 
embedded derivatives which are not considered to be closely related to the host contract, are recognised at fair value determined 
using independent third party valuations or quoted market prices. Changes in fair values of derivatives are recognised immediately in 
the income statement. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Goodwill 

The excess of the fair value at the date of acquisition of the cost of investments in subsidiaries over the fair value of the net assets 
acquired which is not allocated to individual assets and liabilities is determined to be goodwill. Goodwill is initially measured at cost 
and is reviewed at least annually for impairment. Any impairment is recognised immediately in the Group’s income statements and is 
not subsequently reversed. 

Investment management contracts have been identified as separately identifiable intangible assets. These are measured at cost 
and are being amortised on a straight line basis over the expected life of the contract. The useful economic life was reassessed 
during the year, increasing from four to five years. The asset will continue to be amortised on a straight line basis over the remaining 
two years. The charge recognised in the income statement has reduced by £0.3m in the current year.  

DIVIDENDS PAID 

Dividends paid to the Company’s Shareholders are recognised in the period in which the dividends are declared. In the case of final 
dividends, this is when they are approved by the Company’s Shareholders at the AGM. Dividends paid are recognised as a deduction 
from equity. 

SIGNIFICANT ESTIMATES AND UNCERTAINTIES 

The significant accounting estimates used in preparing the financial statements are considered to relate to the determination of fair 
values and impairment of financial instruments. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and 
other relevant factors, and are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 

If an impairment event has occurred, the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the 

Determination of fair values 

Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or liability settled, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s 
length transaction at measurement date. 

The following methods and assumptions are used to estimate the fair values: 

AFS financial assets and financial assets at FVTPL 

The fair value of equity investments and warrants are based on quoted prices, where available. Where quoted prices are not available, 
the fair value is based on recent significant transactions using an earnings based valuation technique. 

The valuation techniques applied follow the International Private Equity and Venture Capital valuation guidelines (December 2012) and 
include some assumptions which are not supportable by observable market prices or rates. The majority of the portfolio of unquoted 
shares and warrants is valued using an earnings based technique. 

Earnings multiples are applied to the maintainable earnings of the private company being valued to determine the enterprise value. 
From this, the value attributable to the Group is calculated based on its holding in the company after making deductions for higher 
ranking instruments in the capital structure. 

The Group’s policy is to use reported earnings based on the latest management accounts available from the company, adjusted for non 
recurring items. For each company being valued, the earnings multiple is derived from a set of comparable listed companies or relevant 
market transaction multiples that have been approved by the Investment Committee. A premium or discount is applied to the earnings 
multiple to adjust for points of difference relating to risk and earnings growth prospects between the comparable company set and the 
private company being valued. Across the portfolio being valued, the discount applied is generally in a range of 5% to 30% and 
exceptionally as high as 63%. The adjusted multiple is the key valuation input which could change fair values significantly if a reasonably 
possible alternative assumption was made. The sensitivity analysis of this input is disclosed in note 3. 

102 / 103

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

SIGNIFICANT ESTIMATES AND UNCERTAINTIES CONTINUED 

Other derivatives 

The fair value of the derivatives used for hedging purposes is derived from pricing models which take account of the contract terms, 
as well as quoted market parameters such as interest rates and volatilities. The Group has loans and receivables with a conversion 
option embedded. Given the low probability of conversion by the Group, the value attributed to these embedded derivatives is nil. 

Other financial assets and liabilities 

Due to their short term nature, the Directors consider the carrying value to be a good approximation of fair value. 

Impairment 

On a quarterly basis the Investment Committee reviews each asset in the Group’s portfolio. Assets which are underperforming or which 
the Committee wishes to receive regular updates on are added to the watch list. During the quarterly review the Committee will identify 
any impairment events and subsequently determine the level of impairment required. Typical impairment events include, but are not 
limited to, non payment of cash interest, deterioration in trading or a restructuring. 

Impairment losses are recognised as the difference between the carrying value of the investment and the discounted value of 
management’s best estimates of future cash flow. These estimates take into account the level and quality of the investee’s earnings, 
the amount and sources of cash flows, the industry in which the investee operates and the likelihood of cash recovery. Estimating the 
quantum and timing of these future proceeds involves significant judgement.  

The actual amount of future cash flows and the date that they are received may differ from these estimates and consequently actual 
losses incurred may differ from those initially recognised in the financial statements. 

Effective interest rate 

The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash flows, including agency and arranging fees, over 
the expected life of the financial instrument. The expected life of an asset is estimated by the relevant Investment Executive using 
knowledge gained from close monitoring of the investment and, where applicable, their presence on the Board. 

Provisions and contingent liabilities 

Provisions are recognised when it is probable that an outflow of economic resources will be required to settle a current legal or 
constructive obligation, which has arisen as a result of a past event, and for which a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of 
the obligation. 

The Group’s onerous contract provision is measured at the present value of the lower of the ongoing cost of the contract and its 
expected termination cost. 

The Group’s contingent liabilities include potential amounts, if any, for legal claims arising in the course of business. Contingent liabilities 
are possible obligations that arise from past events whose existence will be confirmed by the occurrence or non occurrence of one or 
more uncertain events not wholly within the control of the Group. 

Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial statements but are disclosed unless the possibility of an outflow of economic 
resources is remote. 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT 
The Board of Directors have overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. 
There are systems of controls in place to create an acceptable balance between the potential costs, should such a risk occur, and the 
cost of managing those risks. Risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in the market conditions 
and the Group’s activities. 

The Group has exposure to the following risks arising from financial instruments: 

–  market risk 

–  liquidity risk 

–  credit risk 

This section provides details of the Group’s approach to financial risks and describes the methods used by the Board to mitigate and 
control such risk. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

2. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

SIGNIFICANT ESTIMATES AND UNCERTAINTIES CONTINUED 

Other derivatives 

The fair value of the derivatives used for hedging purposes is derived from pricing models which take account of the contract terms, 

as well as quoted market parameters such as interest rates and volatilities. The Group has loans and receivables with a conversion 

option embedded. Given the low probability of conversion by the Group, the value attributed to these embedded derivatives is nil. 

Due to their short term nature, the Directors consider the carrying value to be a good approximation of fair value. 

Other financial assets and liabilities 

Impairment 

On a quarterly basis the Investment Committee reviews each asset in the Group’s portfolio. Assets which are underperforming or which 

the Committee wishes to receive regular updates on are added to the watch list. During the quarterly review the Committee will identify 

any impairment events and subsequently determine the level of impairment required. Typical impairment events include, but are not 

limited to, non payment of cash interest, deterioration in trading or a restructuring. 

Impairment losses are recognised as the difference between the carrying value of the investment and the discounted value of 

management’s best estimates of future cash flow. These estimates take into account the level and quality of the investee’s earnings, 

the amount and sources of cash flows, the industry in which the investee operates and the likelihood of cash recovery. Estimating the 

quantum and timing of these future proceeds involves significant judgement.  

The actual amount of future cash flows and the date that they are received may differ from these estimates and consequently actual 

losses incurred may differ from those initially recognised in the financial statements. 

Effective interest rate 

The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash flows, including agency and arranging fees, over 

the expected life of the financial instrument. The expected life of an asset is estimated by the relevant Investment Executive using 

knowledge gained from close monitoring of the investment and, where applicable, their presence on the Board. 

Provisions and contingent liabilities 

the obligation. 

expected termination cost. 

Provisions are recognised when it is probable that an outflow of economic resources will be required to settle a current legal or 

constructive obligation, which has arisen as a result of a past event, and for which a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of 

The Group’s onerous contract provision is measured at the present value of the lower of the ongoing cost of the contract and its 

The Group’s contingent liabilities include potential amounts, if any, for legal claims arising in the course of business. Contingent liabilities 

are possible obligations that arise from past events whose existence will be confirmed by the occurrence or non occurrence of one or 

more uncertain events not wholly within the control of the Group. 

Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial statements but are disclosed unless the possibility of an outflow of economic 

resources is remote. 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT 

The Board of Directors have overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. 

There are systems of controls in place to create an acceptable balance between the potential costs, should such a risk occur, and the 

cost of managing those risks. Risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in the market conditions 

and the Group’s activities. 

The Group has exposure to the following risks arising from financial instruments: 

–  market risk 

–  liquidity risk 

–  credit risk 

control such risk. 

This section provides details of the Group’s approach to financial risks and describes the methods used by the Board to mitigate and 

MARKET RISK 

Market risk includes exposure to interest rates and foreign currency. 

Interest rate risk 

The Group’s assets include both fixed and floating rate loans and non interest bearing equity investments. The Group’s operations are 
financed with a combination of its Shareholders’ funds, bank borrowings, private placement notes, public bonds, and fixed and floating 
rate notes. The Group manages its exposure to market interest rate movements by matching, to the extent possible, the interest rate 
profiles of assets and liabilities and by using derivative financial instruments. As a result, the Group does not have material financial 
exposure to interest rate movements. The sensitivity of assets and liabilities to interest rate risk is disclosed below. The Group’s 
sensitivity to movements is assumed by applying 100 basis points sensitivity to interest rates to the Group’s forecast model. 

Sensitivity to interest rate risk 

Financial assets 

Financial liabilities 

Floating
£m

1,167.4

Fixed
£m

2014

Total
£m

Floating 
£m 

Fixed 
£m 

2013

Total
£m

1,267.3

2,434.7

1,376.6 

1,616.0 

2,992.6

(509.4)

(393.1)

(902.5)

(1,030.8) 

(404.2) 

(1,435.0)

The sensitivity of floating rate financial assets to the 100 basis points interest rate increase is £8.6m (2013: £13.0m) and the sensitivity of 
financial liabilities to the same interest rate increase is £3.9m (2013: £7.7m). There is no interest rate risk exposure on fixed rate financial 
assets or liabilities. 

Foreign exchange risk 

The Group is exposed to currency risk in relation to the translation of net assets, currency transactions and the translation of net assets, 
and income statement of foreign subsidiaries. The Group’s most significant exposures are to the Euro and the US dollar. Exposure to 
market currency risk is managed by matching assets with liabilities to the extent possible and through the use of derivative instruments. 

The Group regards its interest in overseas subsidiaries as long term investments. Consequently it does not normally hedge the 
translation effect of exchange rate movements on the financial statements of these businesses. 

The Group is also exposed to currency risk arising on the translation of fund management fee income receipts, which are primarily 
denominated in Euro and US dollar. Fund management fee income is hedged to provide more certainty over the value of future 
cash inflows. 

The sensitivity to movements in exchange rates is assumed by applying a percentage measure, based on the volatility of the applicable 
currency, as defined in the Group’s treasury policy, to the net currency asset or liability at the balance sheet date. 

The effect of fluctuations in other currencies is considered by the Directors to be insignificant in the current and prior year. The net 
assets/(liabilities) by currency and the sensitivity of the balances to foreign exchange rates are shown below: 

Sterling 

Euro 

US dollar 

Other currencies 

2014

Net exposure 
£m 

Sensitivity to 
strengthening 
% 

Increase 
in net assets
£m

Net statement 
of financial 
position 
exposure
£m

Forward
exchange
contracts
£m

(48.4)

1,386.1

1,258.4

(1,093.5)

107.3

214.9

1,532.2

(95.9)

(187.4)

1,337.7 

164.9 

11.4 

27.5 

9.3

1,541.5 

– 

15 

20 

10-25 

– 

–

24.7

2.3

–

27.0

104 / 105

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

MARKET RISK CONTINUED 

Foreign exchange risk continued 

Sterling 

Euro 

US dollar 

Other currencies 

2013

Net statement 
of financial 
position 
exposure
£m

(208.4)

Forward 
exchange 
contracts 
£m

1,668.7

1,340.6

(1,240.4)

136.8

319.2

1,588.2

(92.7)

(292.4)

43.2

Net exposure  

£m

Sensitivity to  
strengthening  
% 

Increase 
in net assets 
£m

1,460.3

100.2

44.1

26.8

1,631.4

– 

15 

20 

– 

– 

–

15.0

8.8

–

23.8

The weakening of the above currencies would have resulted in an equal but opposite impact, being a decrease in net assets. 

LIQUIDITY RISK 

The Group manages its liquidity risk by maintaining headroom on its financing facilities, particularly its bank facilities. 

The table below shows the liquidity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, based on contractual repayment dates of principal and 
interest payments. Future interest and principal cash flows have been calculated based on exchange rates and floating rate interest 
rates as at 31 March 2014. It is assumed that Group borrowings under its senior debt facilities remain at the same level as at 31 March 
2014 until contractual maturity. 

Liquidity profile 

As at 31 March 2014  

Non derivative financial liabilities 

Private placements 

Listed notes and bonds 

Unsecured bank debt  

Floating rate secured notes 

Secured bank debt 

US CLO loan notes 

Derivative financial instruments  

Derivative financial instruments  

Contractual maturity analysis 

Less than 
one year 
£m

One to 
two years
£m

Two to  

five years
£m

More than  
five years 
£m 

19.3

 31.9

9.3

0.7

2.1

0.5

39.1

(12.1)

58.9

 9.3

 0.7

 2.1

 9.6

 3.9

(4.5)

53.0

 302.8

 104.0

 20.1

 6.1

–

11.8

5.1

449.9

Total
£m

 403.2

 207.6

 21.5

 141.8

 10.1

 304.8

49.2 

85.0 

– 

131.5 

– 

250.0 

– 

(11.5)

515.7 

1,077.5

As at 31 March 2014 the Group has unutilised debt facilities of £678.3m (2013: £355.0m) which consists of undrawn debt of £594.3m 
(2013: £333.0m) and £84.0m (2013: £22.0m) of unencumbered cash. Unencumbered cash excludes £80.8m (2013: £18.8m) of 
restricted cash held principally by Intermediate Finance II plc and ICG US CLO 2014-1 Limited. 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

MARKET RISK CONTINUED 

Foreign exchange risk continued 

Net statement 

of financial 

position 

exposure

£m

(208.4)

136.8

319.2

1,588.2

Forward 

exchange 

contracts 

£m

1,668.7

(92.7)

(292.4)

43.2

1,340.6

(1,240.4)

Net exposure  

strengthening  

in net assets 

Sensitivity to  

Increase 

£m

1,460.3

100.2

44.1

26.8

1,631.4

% 

– 

15 

20 

– 

– 

The weakening of the above currencies would have resulted in an equal but opposite impact, being a decrease in net assets. 

The Group manages its liquidity risk by maintaining headroom on its financing facilities, particularly its bank facilities. 

The table below shows the liquidity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, based on contractual repayment dates of principal and 

interest payments. Future interest and principal cash flows have been calculated based on exchange rates and floating rate interest 

rates as at 31 March 2014. It is assumed that Group borrowings under its senior debt facilities remain at the same level as at 31 March 

Contractual maturity analysis 

Less than 

one year 

£m

One to 

two years

£m

Two to  

five years

£m

More than  

five years 

£m 

9.3

0.7

2.1

0.5

39.1

(12.1)

58.9

 9.3

 0.7

 2.1

 9.6

 3.9

(4.5)

53.0

 302.8

 104.0

 20.1

 6.1

–

11.8

5.1

449.9

49.2 

85.0 

131.5 

250.0 

– 

– 

– 

515.7 

1,077.5

As at 31 March 2014 the Group has unutilised debt facilities of £678.3m (2013: £355.0m) which consists of undrawn debt of £594.3m 

(2013: £333.0m) and £84.0m (2013: £22.0m) of unencumbered cash. Unencumbered cash excludes £80.8m (2013: £18.8m) of 

restricted cash held principally by Intermediate Finance II plc and ICG US CLO 2014-1 Limited. 

Sterling 

Euro 

US dollar 

Other currencies 

LIQUIDITY RISK 

2014 until contractual maturity. 

Liquidity profile 

As at 31 March 2014  

Non derivative financial liabilities 

Private placements 

Listed notes and bonds 

Unsecured bank debt  

Floating rate secured notes 

Secured bank debt 

US CLO loan notes 

Derivative financial instruments  

Derivative financial instruments  

2013

£m

–

15.0

8.8

–

23.8

Total

£m

 403.2

 207.6

 21.5

 141.8

 10.1

 304.8

(11.5)

As at 31 March 2013  

Non derivative financial liabilities 

Private placements 

Listed notes and bonds 

Unsecured bank debt  

Floating rate secured notes 

Derivative financial instruments 

Derivative financial instruments 

Less than
 one year
£m

One to
 two years
£m

Contractual maturity analysis 

Two to 
 five years 
£m 

More than 
 five years 
£m 

160.5

7.5

326.1

3.7

(39.6)

458.2

12.8

7.5

75.1

3.7

(7.7)

91.4

182.7 

22.4 

33.3 

11.0 

(5.6) 

243.8 

Total
£m

423.8

164.9

434.5

321.5

67.8 

127.5 

– 

303.1 

(0.4) 

(53.3)

498.0 

1,291.4

The Group’s policy is to maintain continuity of funding. Due to the long term nature of the Group’s assets, the Group seeks to ensure 
that the maturity of its debt instruments is matched to the expected maturity of its assets. This has been achieved by the ongoing 
private placement programme with notes maturing between one and five years, short term borrowings under bank facilities, two public 
bonds and by issuing floating and fixed rate notes.  

During the year, the Group has continued its policy of diversifying the sources and term of its borrowings. This is demonstrated by 
the establishment of the $150m private placements notes in May 2013 and the Medium Term Note (MTN) Programme in March 2014. 
The Group issued its first notes off this programme in March 2014 (€50m) and the establishment of this programme demonstrates the 
importance that the Group places of raising capital markets’ borrowings to fund the Group’s activities. 

CREDIT RISK 

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group as a result of a counterparty failing to meet its contractual obligations. This risk is 
principally in connection with the Group’s loans and receivables due from portfolio companies.  

This risk is mitigated by the disciplined credit procedures that the Investment Committee have in place prior to making an investment 
and the ongoing monitoring of that investment throughout its lifespan. In addition, the risk of significant credit loss is further mitigated by 
Group’s policy to diversify its investment portfolio in terms of geography and industry sector and to limit the amount invested in any 
single company.  

19.3

 31.9

Exposure to credit risk 

Non current financial assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Current financial assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Net derivative instruments 

2014  
£m 

2013 
£m

2,080.8 

2,695.8

73.3 

115.8 

164.8 

9.3 

53.9

30.4

52.5

44.2

2,444.0 

2,876.8

106 / 107

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

CREDIT RISK CONTINUED 

Exposure to credit risk continued 

The Group minimises its surplus operational cash balance by the regular forecasting of cash flow requirements, debt management 
and cash pooling arrangements. Credit risk exposure on cash and derivative instruments is managed in accordance with the Group’s 
treasury policy which provides limits on exposures with any single financial institution. 

The Directors consider the Group’s credit exposure to trade and other receivables and current assets held for sale to be low and as 
such no further analysis has been presented. 

Maximum exposure to credit risk by geography 

UK 

Europe 

North America 

Asia Pacific 

2014  
£m 

603.9 

2013 
£m

718.1

1,058.7 

1,558.9

313.9 

104.3 

132.7

286.1

2,080.8 

2,695.8

The Group’s exposure to the Euro is mitigated by the use of foreign exchange derivatives’ contracts, see page 105. This exposure is 
derived from the Group’s investment portfolio being weighted towards Europe and in particular France. This is reflective of the historical 
focus of the business, however the recent investment pattern has been more geographically diverse. The investment portfolio is not 
exposed to any single industry, with investments diversified across sectors. 

IMPAIRMENT LOSSES 

Impairment 

Balance at 1 April 

Charged to income statement 

Impairment arising through restructuring of assets 

Recovery of previously impaired assets 

Assets written off in year 

Foreign exchange  

Balance at 31 March  

2014 
£m

549.2

116.3

17.3

(21.2)

(311.2)

(8.7)

341.7

Group

2013  
£m

517.0

141.1

–

(61.1) 

(56.7) 

8.9

549.2

2014 
 £m 

414.9 

89.5 

11.6 

(18.2) 

(290.2) 

(4.4) 

203.2 

Company

2013 
£m

353.1

96.3

–

(40.1)

–

5.6

414.9

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the Directors’ assessment of the maximum credit risk exposure of the Group and 
Company at the balance sheet date. Impairment losses taken during the year reflect the decline in recoverability on individual assets, 
either as a result of company specific or of general macroeconomic conditions. 

The Directors believe that credit risk as a result of the concentration of significant counterparties is low as there is no individual 
counterparty comprising more than 10% of the Group’s total exposure. The Group’s largest individual exposure at 31 March 2014 was 
£114.7m to Applus+ (2013: £120.0m to Medi Partenaires). 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

such no further analysis has been presented. 

Maximum exposure to credit risk by geography 

UK 

Europe 

North America 

Asia Pacific 

IMPAIRMENT LOSSES 

Impairment 

Balance at 1 April 

Charged to income statement 

Impairment arising through restructuring of assets 

Recovery of previously impaired assets 

Assets written off in year 

Foreign exchange  

Balance at 31 March  

2014  

£m 

603.9 

313.9 

104.3 

2013 

£m

718.1

132.7

286.1

1,058.7 

1,558.9

2,080.8 

2,695.8

2014 

£m

549.2

116.3

17.3

(21.2)

(311.2)

(8.7)

341.7

Group

2013  

£m

517.0

141.1

–

(61.1) 

(56.7) 

8.9

549.2

2014 

 £m 

414.9 

89.5 

11.6 

(18.2) 

(290.2) 

(4.4) 

203.2 

Company

2013 

£m

353.1

96.3

(40.1)

–

–

5.6

414.9

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

CREDIT RISK CONTINUED 

Exposure to credit risk continued 

The Group minimises its surplus operational cash balance by the regular forecasting of cash flow requirements, debt management 

and cash pooling arrangements. Credit risk exposure on cash and derivative instruments is managed in accordance with the Group’s 

treasury policy which provides limits on exposures with any single financial institution. 

The Directors consider the Group’s credit exposure to trade and other receivables and current assets held for sale to be low and as 

FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

The information set out below provides information about how the Group determines fair values of various financial assets and 
financial liabilities. 

The following table provides an analysis of financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, 
grouped into Levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable. 

–  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities 

–  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable 

for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices) 

–  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not 

based on observable market data (i.e. unobservable inputs) 

This is followed by a more detailed analysis of the financial instruments which are based on unobservable inputs (Level 3 assets). 
The subsequent tables provide reconciliations of movement in their fair value during the year split by asset category and by geography. 
The Group is required to provide disclosures at a more detailed level than by asset category, segregating each asset category by sector 
or geography. The Group has chosen to present financial instruments by geography as the diverse nature of the Group’s assets makes 
any disclosure of assets by industry less meaningful to the Group’s risk profile than geographical factors. In the first year of adoption 
there is no requirement to provide comparative geographical information.  

The Group’s exposure to the Euro is mitigated by the use of foreign exchange derivatives’ contracts, see page 105. This exposure is 

derived from the Group’s investment portfolio being weighted towards Europe and in particular France. This is reflective of the historical 

focus of the business, however the recent investment pattern has been more geographically diverse. The investment portfolio is not 

exposed to any single industry, with investments diversified across sectors. 

Financial assets/ 
financial liabilities 

Fair value as at  
31 March 2014  
£m 

Fair  
value 
hierarchy 

260.3 

Level 3 

Investments 
excluding 
CLOs and 
funds 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the Directors’ assessment of the maximum credit risk exposure of the Group and 

Company at the balance sheet date. Impairment losses taken during the year reflect the decline in recoverability on individual assets, 

either as a result of company specific or of general macroeconomic conditions. 

The Directors believe that credit risk as a result of the concentration of significant counterparties is low as there is no individual 

counterparty comprising more than 10% of the Group’s total exposure. The Group’s largest individual exposure at 31 March 2014 was 

£114.7m to Applus+ (2013: £120.0m to Medi Partenaires). 

Investments in 
funds 

275.4 

Level 3 

Relationship of 
unobservable inputs to 
fair value 

The higher the 
adjusted multiple, the 
higher the valuation 

Valuation techniques and inputs 

Significant unobservable inputs 

The discount applied is 
generally in a range of 5% 
to 30% and exceptionally 
as high as 63%.  
A premium has been 
applied to three assets in 
the range of 15% to 43%.  
The earnings multiple is 
generally in the range of 
9 to 15, and exceptionally 
a high as 34 and as low 
as 4 

Earnings based technique.  
The earnings multiple is derived from a 
set of comparable listed companies or 
relevant market transaction multiples.  
A premium or discount is applied to the 
earnings multiple to adjust for points of 
difference relating to risk and earnings 
growth prospects between the                     
comparable company set and the 
private company being valued.  
Earnings multiples are applied to the 
maintainable earnings to determine the 
enterprise value. From this, the value 
attributable to the Group is calculated 
based on its holding in the company after 
making deductions for higher ranking 
instruments in the capital structure.  
To determine the value of warrants, 
the exercise price is deducted from 
the equity value 

The NAV of the underlying 
fund, typically calculated 
under IFRS 

The higher the NAV, 
the higher the fair value

The Net Asset Value (NAV) of the fund 
is based on the underlying investments 
which are held either as FVTPL assets 
or as loans and receivables initially 
recognised at fair value and subsequently 
valued at amortised cost. The carrying 
value of loans and receivables held at 
amortised cost are considered a 
reasonable approximation of fair value. 
We have reviewed the underlying valuation 
techniques and consider them to be in line 
with the Group’s 

108 / 109

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

Financial assets/ 
financial liabilities 

Listed credit 
fund 
investments  

Unlisted CLO 
investments 

US CLO 
investments 

US CLO loan 
notes 

Fair value as at  
31 March 2014  
£m 

Fair  
value 
hierarchy 

Valuation techniques and inputs 

Significant unobservable inputs 

Relationship of 
unobservable inputs to 
fair value 

110.9 

Level 1 

Quoted bid prices in an active market 

n/a 

n/a 

174.4 

Level 3 

Discounted cash flows 

Discounted cash flow at a discount rate 
of 8%. The following assumptions are 
applied to each investment’s cashflows: 
4% annual default rate, 15% annual 
prepayment rate, 50% recovery rate for 
senior loans and 0% recovery rate for 
remainder  
For new investments where models are 
not yet available, external valuations are 
obtained  

191.0 

Level 2 

The fair value has been determined using 
independent broker quotes based on 
observable inputs  

n/a 

(189.6) 

Level 3 

The loan notes have significant 
unobservable inputs as they trade 
infrequently. The fair value of the 
loan notes is determined primarily 
by reference to a market value of the 
underlying assets in the CLO structures 
which are determined using independent 
broker quotes based on observable 
inputs. These liabilities will be transferred 
to level 2 once the notes start trading and 
there are market prices available 

The CLO loan notes are 
limited recourse debt 
obligations payable solely 
from the underlying 
collateral of the CLO. 
The loan notes therefore 
provide a return equal 
to the residual economic 
value of the underlying 
collateral 

The higher the cash 
flows the higher the 
fair value. 
The higher the 
discount, the lower 
the fair value 

n/a 

The higher the residual 
economic value of the 
underlying collateral 
the higher the fair value

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

Intelsat 

31.6 

Level 1 
(2013: 
Level 3) 

Intelsat listed a proportion of their 
shares on the New York Stock Exchange, 
providing an external basis for valuing the 
Group’s investment 

Derivatives 

9.3 

Level 2 

Total 

863.3 

The Group uses widely recognised 
valuation models for determining the fair 
values of over-the-counter interest rate 
swaps and forward foreign exchange 
contracts. The most frequently applied 
valuation techniques include forward 
pricing and swap models, using present 
value calculations. The valuations are 
market observable, internally calculated 
and verified to externally sourced data and 
are therefore included within level 2 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial assets at FVTPL 

Designated as FVTPL  

– UK 

– US 

– France 

– Australia 

– Germany 

– Other 

Derivative financial instruments – warrants 

– France 

– Denmark 

– Germany 

– UK 

US CLO loan 

(189.6) 

Level 3 

The loan notes have significant 

The CLO loan notes are 

The higher the residual 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

– France 

– UK  

– Australia  

– US 

– Other 

Other derivative financial instruments 

Financial liabilities at FVTPL 

– US CLO loan notes 

Derivative financial liabilities 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

Financial assets/ 

31 March 2014  

value 

Fair value as at  

Fair  

Relationship of 

unobservable inputs to 

financial liabilities 

£m 

hierarchy 

Valuation techniques and inputs 

Significant unobservable inputs 

fair value 

Listed credit 

110.9 

Level 1 

Quoted bid prices in an active market 

n/a 

n/a 

Unlisted CLO 

174.4 

Level 3 

Discounted cash flow at a discount rate 

Discounted cash flows 

The higher the cash 

fund 

investments  

investments 

of 8%. The following assumptions are 

applied to each investment’s cashflows: 

4% annual default rate, 15% annual 

prepayment rate, 50% recovery rate for 

senior loans and 0% recovery rate for 

remainder  

obtained  

For new investments where models are 

not yet available, external valuations are 

flows the higher the 

fair value. 

The higher the 

discount, the lower 

the fair value 

US CLO 

191.0 

Level 2 

The fair value has been determined using 

n/a 

n/a 

investments 

independent broker quotes based on 

observable inputs  

notes 

unobservable inputs as they trade 

limited recourse debt 

economic value of the 

infrequently. The fair value of the 

obligations payable solely 

underlying collateral 

loan notes is determined primarily 

from the underlying 

the higher the fair value

by reference to a market value of the 

collateral of the CLO. 

underlying assets in the CLO structures 

which are determined using independent 

broker quotes based on observable 

inputs. These liabilities will be transferred 

The loan notes therefore 

provide a return equal 

to the residual economic 

value of the underlying 

to level 2 once the notes start trading and 

collateral 

there are market prices available 

Intelsat 

31.6 

Level 1 

(2013: 

Intelsat listed a proportion of their 

n/a 

shares on the New York Stock Exchange, 

Level 3) 

providing an external basis for valuing the 

Group’s investment 

Derivatives 

9.3 

Level 2 

The Group uses widely recognised 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

valuation models for determining the fair 

values of over-the-counter interest rate 

swaps and forward foreign exchange 

contracts. The most frequently applied 

valuation techniques include forward 

pricing and swap models, using present 

value calculations. The valuations are 

market observable, internally calculated 

and verified to externally sourced data and 

are therefore included within level 2 

Total 

863.3 

2014

Total 
£m

 484.5

195.6

 73.9

 16.4

6.5

 14.8

791.7

 8.7

 3.8

 3.8

 2.2

18.5

 63.7

 82.1

 34.0

 14.5

 39.1

233.4

18.6

Level 1 
£m

Level 2 
 £m 

Level 3 
 £m 

 110.9

– 

 373.6 

–

–

–

–

–

191.0 

– 

– 

– 

– 

4.6 

 73.9 

 16.4 

 6.5 

 14.8 

110.9

191.0 

489.8 

 8.7 

 3.8 

 3.8 

 2.2 

 18.5 

 63.7 

 50.5 

 34.0 

 14.5 

 39.1 

201.8 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

 31.6

–

–

–

31. 6

–

142.5

–

–

–

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

18.6 

209.6 

– 

 9.3 

 9.3 

710.1 

1,062.2

 189.6 

– 

 189.6 

 189.6

9.3

198.9

The only transfers between levels in the current year arose on one asset which listed a proportion of their shares on the New York Stock 
Exchange providing an external basis for valuing the Group’s instruments. As a result the instruments were transferred from Level 3 to 
Level 1. 

110 / 111

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

Financial assets at FVTPL 

Designated as FVTPL  

Derivative financial instruments – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Other derivative financial instruments  

Financial liabilities at FVTPL 

Derivative financial liabilities 

Level 1
£m

103.7

–

–

–

103.7

–

Level 2  

£m

Level 3 
 £m 

190.7 

40.2 

350.5 

– 

581.4 

–

–

–

54.9

54.9

10.7

2013

Total 
£m

294.4

40.2

350.5

54.9

740.0

– 

10.7

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial assets 

The tables detail the movements in financial assets valued using the Level 3 basis of measurement in aggregate. 

Within the income statement, realised gains and fair value movements are included within gains on investments, and foreign exchange is 
included within finance costs. Within other comprehensive income, fair value movements and foreign exchange are included within fair 
value movements. 

At 1 April 2013 

Transfer to Level 1 

Total gains or losses in the income statement 

– Realised gains 

– Fair value gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Total gains or losses in other comprehensive income 

– Unrealised gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

Financial
 assets at 
FVTPL 
£m

190.7

–

Derivative 
financial 
instruments  
– warrants
 £m

40.2

–

AFS 
 assets 
 £m 

350.5 

(38.0) 

Total
 £m

581.4

(38.0)

(16.9)

20.6

(15.4)

–

–

293.2

(24.7)

41.0

1.3

489.8

(11.2) 

(125.7) 

(153.8)

7.3

2.5

–

–

–

–

–

(20.3) 

18.5

– 

– 

8.5 

(17.0) 

19.7 

(18.5) 

3.3 

19.0 

27.9

(12.9)

8.5

(17.0)

312.9

(43.2)

44.3

–

201.8 

710.1

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

Financial assets at FVTPL 

Designated as FVTPL  

Derivative financial instruments – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Other derivative financial instruments  

Financial liabilities at FVTPL 

Derivative financial liabilities 

At 1 April 2013 

Transfer to Level 1 

– Realised gains 

– Fair value gains 

– Foreign exchange 

– Unrealised gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial assets 

The tables detail the movements in financial assets valued using the Level 3 basis of measurement in aggregate. 

Within the income statement, realised gains and fair value movements are included within gains on investments, and foreign exchange is 

included within finance costs. Within other comprehensive income, fair value movements and foreign exchange are included within fair 

value movements. 

Total gains or losses in the income statement 

(11.2) 

(125.7) 

(153.8)

Total gains or losses in other comprehensive income 

Level 1

£m

103.7

103.7

–

–

–

–

Level 2  

£m

Level 3 

 £m 

–

–

–

54.9

54.9

10.7

190.7 

40.2 

350.5 

581.4 

– 

– 

Financial

 assets at 

FVTPL 

£m

190.7

–

(16.9)

20.6

(15.4)

–

–

293.2

(24.7)

41.0

1.3

489.8

Derivative 

financial 

instruments  

– warrants

 £m

40.2

–

7.3

2.5

–

–

–

–

–

(20.3) 

18.5

AFS 

 assets 

 £m 

350.5 

(38.0) 

– 

– 

8.5 

(17.0) 

19.7 

(18.5) 

3.3 

19.0 

201.8 

710.1

2013

Total 

£m

294.4

40.2

350.5

54.9

740.0

10.7

Total

 £m

581.4

(38.0)

27.9

(12.9)

8.5

(17.0)

312.9

(43.2)

44.3

–

At 1 April 2012  

Total gains or losses in the income statement 

– Impairments 

– Fair value gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Total gains or losses in other comprehensive income 

– Unrealised gains 

– Realised gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Transfers between assets 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2013 

The level 3 fair value movements by geography are as follows:   

Financial assets at FVTPL 

At 1 April 2013 

Total gains or losses in the 
income statement 

– Realised gains 

– Fair value gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

UK  
£m 

117.7 

(11.8) 

16.1 

(6.4) 

276.2 

(18.2) 

– 

– 

US
£m

5.7

–

(0.7)

(0.4)

–

–

–

–

373.6 

4.6

France
 £m

32.4

Australia 
£m

28.6

–

0.9

(2.2)

1.8

(1.2)

40.9

1.3

73.9

(4.6)

(0.5)

(5.7)

3.7

(5.1)

–

–

16.4

Derivative financial instruments – warrants 

At 1 April 2013 

Total gains or losses in the  
income statement 

– Realised gains 

– Fair value gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

France 
£m

9.8

Denmark 
£m

Germany 
£m

3.8

5.0

(0.2)

0.6

(0.2)

(1.3)

8.7

–

–

–

–

3.8

(0.6)

(0.4)

(0.2)

–

3.8

Financial
 assets at 
FVTPL
 £m

57.4

Derivative 
 financial  
instruments 
– warrants  
£m 

32.6 

–

40.8

2.9

–

–

–

93.2

(3.5)

(0.1)

–

190.7

– 

9.9 

0.9 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.6) 

– 

(2.6) 

40.2 

Germany  
£m 

– 

– 

– 

(0.4) 

7.1 

(0.2) 

– 

– 

6.5 

UK  
£m 

5.5 

(7.7) 

4.4 

– 

– 

2.2 

AFS 
 assets  
£m 

283.4 

2.4 

– 

– 

50.9 

11.5 

10.7 

2.3 

Total 
£m

373.4

2.4

50.7

3.8

50.9

11.5

10.7

95.5

(13.5) 

(17.6)

0.2 

2.6 

0.1

–

350.5 

581.4

Other 
 £m 

6.3 

(0.5) 

4.8 

(0.3) 

4.4 

– 

0.1 

– 

14.8 

Other 
 £m 

16.1 

(2.7) 

2.7 

2.9 

(19.0) 

– 

Total
 £m

190.7

(16.9)

20.6

(15.4)

293.2

(24.7)

41.0

1.3

489.8

Total
 £m

40.2

(11.2)

7.3

2.5

(20.3)

18.5

112 / 113

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial assets continued 

AFS assets 

At 1 April 2013 

Transfer to Level 1 

Total gains or losses in the  
income statement 

– Realised gains 

Total gains or losses in other 
comprehensive income 

– Unrealised gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

France  
£m 

64.3 

– 

UK 
£m

161.1

–

US 
£m

54.8

(38.0)

Australia  

£m

36.0

–

Other  
£m 

34.3 

– 

Total 
£m

350.5

(38.0)

(0.8) 

(120.4)

–

(3.6) 

(0.9) 

(125.7)

4.2 

(1.5) 

0.1 

(2.6) 

– 

– 

20.5

(0.7)

4.3

(14.3)

–

–

(0.9)

(1.4)

–

–

–

–

63.7 

50.5

14.5

(18.7) 

(12.8) 

15.2

(1.1) 

–

19.0

34.0

3.4 

(0.6) 

0.1 

(0.5) 

3.3 

– 

39.1 

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial liabilities 

This table details the movements in financial liabilities valued using the Level 3 basis of measurement in aggregate. 

Financial liabilities at FVTPL – US CLO loan notes  

At 1 April 2013 

Total gains or losses in other comprehensive income 

– Unrealised gains 

Purchases 

At 31 March 2014 

FAIR VALUE 

The following table shows the sensitivity of fair values grouped in Level 3 to adjusted earnings multiples in the valuation models,  
for a selection of the largest financial assets. It is assumed that the multiple was changed by 10% while all the other variables were  
held constant. 

Financial assets at fair value 

2014 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

2013 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Sensitivity of financial asset to 
adjusted earnings multiple

Value in 
accounts
 £m

+10% 
 £m 

–10%
 £m 

 489.8

 18.5

 201.8

710.1

190.7

40.2

350.5

581.4

 553.5 

 23.9 

 234.9 

812.3 

207.7 

47.5 

380.1 

635.3 

 426.1

 13.1

 168.7

607.9

173.7

32.8

320.9

527.4

8.5

(17.0)

19.7

(18.5)

3.3

19.0

201.8

£m

–

1.8

187.8

189.6

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

3. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION CONTINUED 

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial assets continued 

France  

£m 

64.3 

– 

UK 

£m

161.1

–

US 

£m

54.8

(38.0)

Australia  

£m

36.0

–

Other  

£m 

34.3 

– 

Total 

£m

350.5

(38.0)

(0.8) 

(120.4)

(3.6) 

(0.9) 

(125.7)

(0.9)

(1.4)

–

–

–

–

–

4.2 

(1.5) 

0.1 

(2.6) 

– 

– 

20.5

(0.7)

4.3

(14.3)

–

–

63.7 

50.5

14.5

(18.7) 

(12.8) 

15.2

(1.1) 

–

19.0

34.0

3.4 

(0.6) 

0.1 

(0.5) 

3.3 

– 

39.1 

8.5

(17.0)

19.7

(18.5)

3.3

19.0

201.8

£m

–

1.8

187.8

189.6

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial liabilities 

This table details the movements in financial liabilities valued using the Level 3 basis of measurement in aggregate. 

Financial liabilities at FVTPL – US CLO loan notes  

Total gains or losses in other comprehensive income 

AFS assets 

At 1 April 2013 

Transfer to Level 1 

Total gains or losses in the  

income statement 

– Realised gains 

Total gains or losses in other 

comprehensive income 

– Unrealised gains 

– Foreign exchange 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

At 31 March 2014 

At 1 April 2013 

– Unrealised gains 

Purchases 

At 31 March 2014 

FAIR VALUE 

held constant. 

The following table shows the sensitivity of fair values grouped in Level 3 to adjusted earnings multiples in the valuation models,  

for a selection of the largest financial assets. It is assumed that the multiple was changed by 10% while all the other variables were  

Financial assets at fair value 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

2014 

2013 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Sensitivity of financial asset to 

adjusted earnings multiple

Value in 

accounts

 £m

+10% 

 £m 

–10%

 £m 

 489.8

 18.5

 201.8

710.1

190.7

40.2

350.5

581.4

 553.5 

 23.9 

 234.9 

812.3 

207.7 

47.5 

380.1 

635.3 

 426.1

 13.1

 168.7

607.9

173.7

32.8

320.9

527.4

DERIVATIVES 

The Group utilises the following derivative instruments for economic hedging purposes: 

Foreign exchange derivatives 

Forward foreign exchange contracts 

Cross currency swaps 

Interest rate swaps 

Total 

Contract or 
underlying 
principal 
amount
£m

1,568.5

85.2

33.2

1,686.9

Group and Company 2014 

Group and Company 2013

Fair values

Asset 
£m

Liability
 £m

12.1

2.7

3.8

18.6

(4.5)

(4.8)

–

(9.3)

Contract or 
underlying 
principal  
amount  
£m 

1,588.3 

139.1 

134.7 

1,862.1 

Fair values

Asset  
£m 

Liability 
£m

33.6 

11.6 

9.7 

54.9 

(6.8)

(3.8)

(0.1)

(10.7)

Included in derivative financial instruments is accrued interest on swaps of £0.7m (2013: £1.1m). 

CAPITAL MANAGEMENT 

The primary objectives of the Group’s capital management are to ensure that the Group complies with externally imposed capital 
requirements by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and ensure that the Group maximises the return to shareholders through the 
optimisation of the debt and equity balance. The Group’s strategy has remained unchanged from the year ended 31 March 2013. 

The capital structure comprises debts, which includes the borrowings disclosed in note 22, cash and cash equivalents, and capital and 
reserves of the parent company, comprising called up share capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in the Consolidated 
Statement of Changes in Equity. 

The Group has complied with the imposed minimum capital throughout the year. The full Pillar 3 disclosures are available on the 
Company’s website www.icgplc.com. 

4. PROFIT OF PARENT COMPANY 
As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the income statement of the parent company is not presented as part of these 
financial statements. The parent company’s profit for the year amounted to £145.2m (2013: £97.8m). 

5. BUSINESS AND GEOGRAPHICAL SEGMENTS 
For management purposes, the Group is currently organised into two distinct business groups, the Fund Management Company (FMC) 
and the Investment Company (IC). Segment information about these businesses is presented below. This is as reviewed by the 
Executive Committee, with the exception of £14.4m relating to gains on the investment in ICG Europe Fund V. This is presented below 
in gains on investments, whereas it is included within net interest income for internal reporting purposes. 

The Group reports the profit of the FMC separately from the profits generated by the IC. The FMC is defined as the operating unit and 
as such incurs the majority of the Group’s costs, including the cost of the investment network, i.e. the Investment Executives and the 
local offices, as well as the cost of most support functions, primarily information technology, human resources and marketing.  

The IC is charged a management fee of 1% of the carrying value of the average investment portfolio by the FMC and this is shown 
below as fee income. The costs of finance, treasury and portfolio administration teams, and the costs related to being a listed entity, 
are allocated to the IC. The remuneration of the Managing Directors is allocated equally to the FMC and the IC.  

114 / 115

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

5. BUSINESS AND GEOGRAPHICAL SEGMENTS CONTINUED 

ANALYSIS OF INCOME AND PROFIT BEFORE TAX 

Year ended 31 March 2014 

External fee income 

Inter-segmental fee 

Fund management fee income 

Other operating income 

Gains on investments 

Net interest income 

Dividend income 

Net fair value loss on derivatives  

Impairment 

Staff costs 

Incentive scheme costs 

Other administrative expenses 

Profit before tax 

Year ended 31 March 2013  

External fee income 

Inter-segmental fee 

Fund management fee income 

Other operating income 

Gains on investments 

Net interest income 

Dividend income 

Net fair value loss on derivatives  

Impairment 

Staff costs 

Incentive scheme costs 

Other administrative expenses 

Profit before tax 

Europe 
Mezzanine
£m

55.6

16.0

71.6

Europe 
Credit
£m

18.9

2.2

21.1

Asia 
Pacific
£m

4.4

1.5

5.9

Europe 
Mezzanine
£m

51.4

19.3

70.7

Europe 
Credit
£m

19.2

0.5

19.7

Asia
Pacific
£m

6.8

2.6

9.4

US
£m

–

1.0

1.0

US
£m

–

0.9

0.9

Total  
FMC 
£m 

78.9 

20.7 

99.6 

– 

– 

(0.4) 

1.3 

– 

100.5 

IC 
£m 

– 

(20.7) 

(20.7) 

6.9 

149.4 

133.8 

19.7 

(16.4) 

272.7 

Total
£m

78.9

–

78.9

6.9

149.4

133.4

21.0

(16.4)

373.2

– 

(112.4) 

(112.4)

(23.5) 

(13.6) 

(28.4) 

35.0 

Total 
 FMC 
£m 

77.4 

23.3 

100.7 

– 

– 

(0.4) 

1.9 

– 

(6.8) 

(22.6) 

(7.2) 

123.7 

IC 
£m 

– 

(23.3) 

(23.3) 

1.4 

73.0 

(30.3)

(36.2)

(35.6)

158.7

Total
£m

77.4

–

77.4

1.4

73.0

159.7 

159.3

2.4 

(5.7) 

4.3

(5.7)

102.2 

207.5 

309.7

– 

(20.9) 

(14.6) 

(26.3) 

40.4 

(80.0) 

(3.0) 

(18.1) 

(4.2) 

(80.0)

(23.9)

(32.7)

(30.5)

102.2 

142.6

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

5. BUSINESS AND GEOGRAPHICAL SEGMENTS CONTINUED 

ANALYSIS OF INCOME AND PROFIT BEFORE TAX 

Europe 

Mezzanine

£m

55.6

16.0

71.6

Europe 

Credit

£m

18.9

2.2

21.1

Asia 

Pacific

£m

4.4

1.5

5.9

Fund management fee income 

Year ended 31 March 2014 

External fee income 

Inter-segmental fee 

Other operating income 

Gains on investments 

Net interest income 

Dividend income 

Net fair value loss on derivatives  

Impairment 

Staff costs 

Incentive scheme costs 

Other administrative expenses 

Profit before tax 

Year ended 31 March 2013  

External fee income 

Inter-segmental fee 

Fund management fee income 

Other operating income 

Gains on investments 

Net interest income 

Dividend income 

Net fair value loss on derivatives  

Impairment 

Staff costs 

Incentive scheme costs 

Other administrative expenses 

Profit before tax 

US

£m

–

1.0

1.0

US

£m

–

0.9

0.9

Total  

FMC 

£m 

78.9 

20.7 

99.6 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.4) 

1.3 

100.5 

(23.5) 

(13.6) 

(28.4) 

35.0 

Total 

 FMC 

£m 

77.4 

23.3 

100.7 

(0.4) 

1.9 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(20.9) 

(14.6) 

(26.3) 

40.4 

(112.4) 

(112.4)

IC 

£m 

– 

(20.7) 

(20.7) 

6.9 

149.4 

133.8 

19.7 

(16.4) 

272.7 

(6.8) 

(22.6) 

(7.2) 

123.7 

IC 

£m 

– 

(23.3) 

(23.3) 

1.4 

73.0 

2.4 

(5.7) 

(80.0) 

(3.0) 

(18.1) 

(4.2) 

Total

£m

78.9

–

78.9

6.9

149.4

133.4

21.0

(16.4)

373.2

(30.3)

(36.2)

(35.6)

158.7

Total

£m

77.4

–

77.4

1.4

73.0

4.3

(5.7)

(80.0)

(23.9)

(32.7)

(30.5)

159.7 

159.3

102.2 

207.5 

309.7

102.2 

142.6

RECONCILIATION OF BALANCE SHEET POSITION REPORTED TO THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE TO THE POSITION 
REPORTED UNDER IFRS 

Included under the ‘Adjustments’ heading in the table below are the investments in ICG Europe Fund V and ICG US CLO 2014-1. 
For internal reporting purposes the interest owed on Fund V investments is presented within debtors whereas under IFRS it is included 
within the value of the investment. The US CLO is presented as a fair value investment for internal reporting purposes, whereas the 
statutory financial statements present the US CLO on a fully consolidated basis.  

Financial assets 

Other assets 

Total assets 

Financial liabilities  

Other liabilities  

Total liabilities  

Equity 

Total equity and liabilities  

Internally 
reported 
£m

1,907.7

333.2

2,240.9

586.8

146.1

732.9

1,508.0

2,240.9

Adjustments 
£m

173.1

51.4

224.5

189.6

34.9

224.5

–

224.5

2014

Financial 
statements
 £m

2,080.8

384.6

2,465.4

776.4

181.0

957.4

Internally 
reported  
£m 

2,695.1 

204.3 

2,899.4 

1,161.3 

175.2 

1,336.5 

1,508.0

2,465.4

1,562.9 

2,899.4 

Adjustments  
£m 

0.7 

(0.7) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2013

Financial 
statements 
£m

2,695.8

203.6

2,899.4

1,161.3

175.2

1,336.5

1,562.9

2,899.4

Europe 

Mezzanine

£m

51.4

19.3

70.7

Europe 

Credit

£m

19.2

0.5

19.7

Asia

Pacific

£m

6.8

2.6

9.4

ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS BY GEOGRAPHICAL SEGMENT 

Europe 

Asia Pacific 

North America 

GROUP REVENUE BY GEOGRAPHICAL SEGMENT 

Europe 

Asia Pacific 

North America 

2014  
£m 

2013 
£m

1,662.6 

2,277.0

104.3 

313.9 

286.1

132.7

2,080.8 

2,695.8

2014  
£m 

388.0 

36.3 

10.3 

434.6 

2013 
£m

313.4

50.2

6.8

370.4

116 / 117

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

6. FINANCE INCOME AND FINANCE COSTS 

GROUP FINANCE INCOME 

Interest income recognised under the amortised cost method 

Dividend income from equity investments 

Interest on bank deposits 

2014  
£m 

177.9 

21.0 

0.5 

199.4 

Interest income on interest bearing loans and investments includes £10.2m (2013: £17.2m) accrued on impaired loans. 

GROUP FINANCE COSTS 

Interest expense recognised under the amortised cost method 

Net fair value movements on derivatives  

Arrangement and commitment fees 

7. GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON INVESTMENTS 

GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON AFS FINANCIAL ASSETS RECOGNISED IN OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

Realised gains on ordinary shares recycled to profit 

Impairments of AFS financial assets recycled to profit 

Net gains recycled to profit 

Gains and losses arising on AFS financial assets 

– Fair value movement on equity instruments 

– Fair value movement on other assets 

Foreign exchange 

(Losses)/gains arising in the AFS reserve in the year 

GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON INVESTMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT 

Realised gains on warrants 

Realised gains on assets designated as FVTPL 

Realised gains of AFS financial assets recycled from AFS reserves 

Realised gains on other assets 

Unrealised gains and losses on assets designated as FVTPL 

– Fair value movement on equity instruments  

– Fair value movement on warrants 

– Fair value movement on other assets 

Fair value movements on FVTPL financial assets 

Realised losses on amortised cost assets 

Gains on investments 

The fair value movement on equity instruments includes £0.9m (2013: £nil) relating to the Group’s US CLO. 

2014  
£m 

30.6 

16.4 

14.4 

61.4 

2014  
£m 

(125.7) 

– 

(125.7) 

(1.6) 

7.2 

(6.8) 

(1.2) 

2014  
£m 

11.2 

16.9 

125.7 

0.3 

154.1 

10.1 

(6.3) 

4.8 

8.6 

162.7 

(13.3) 

149.4 

2013 
£m

214.2

4.3

0.1

218.6

2013 
£m

39.6

5.7

15.4

60.7

2013 
£m

(11.5)

4.0

(7.5)

58.8

1.7

6.6

67.1

2013 
£m

0.8

1.8

11.5

–

14.1

39.3

9.5

10.1

58.9

73.0

–

73.0

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interest income on interest bearing loans and investments includes £10.2m (2013: £17.2m) accrued on impaired loans. 

7. GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON INVESTMENTS 

GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON AFS FINANCIAL ASSETS RECOGNISED IN OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

6. FINANCE INCOME AND FINANCE COSTS 

GROUP FINANCE INCOME 

Interest income recognised under the amortised cost method 

Dividend income from equity investments 

Interest on bank deposits 

GROUP FINANCE COSTS 

Interest expense recognised under the amortised cost method 

Net fair value movements on derivatives  

Arrangement and commitment fees 

Realised gains on ordinary shares recycled to profit 

Impairments of AFS financial assets recycled to profit 

Net gains recycled to profit 

Gains and losses arising on AFS financial assets 

– Fair value movement on equity instruments 

– Fair value movement on other assets 

Foreign exchange 

(Losses)/gains arising in the AFS reserve in the year 

Realised gains on warrants 

Realised gains on assets designated as FVTPL 

Realised gains of AFS financial assets recycled from AFS reserves 

Realised gains on other assets 

Unrealised gains and losses on assets designated as FVTPL 

– Fair value movement on equity instruments  

– Fair value movement on warrants 

– Fair value movement on other assets 

Fair value movements on FVTPL financial assets 

Realised losses on amortised cost assets 

Gains on investments 

GAINS AND LOSSES ARISING ON INVESTMENTS RECOGNISED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT 

2014  

£m 

177.9 

21.0 

0.5 

199.4 

2014  

£m 

30.6 

16.4 

14.4 

61.4 

2014  

£m 

(125.7) 

– 

(125.7) 

(1.6) 

7.2 

(6.8) 

(1.2) 

2014  

£m 

11.2 

16.9 

125.7 

0.3 

154.1 

10.1 

(6.3) 

4.8 

8.6 

162.7 

(13.3) 

149.4 

2013 

£m

214.2

4.3

0.1

218.6

2013 

£m

39.6

5.7

15.4

60.7

2013 

£m

(11.5)

4.0

(7.5)

58.8

1.7

6.6

67.1

2013 

£m

0.8

1.8

11.5

–

14.1

39.3

9.5

10.1

58.9

73.0

–

73.0

The fair value movement on equity instruments includes £0.9m (2013: £nil) relating to the Group’s US CLO. 

8. IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS 

Impairment on loans and receivables 

New and increased 

Write off 

Recoveries 

Total net impairment on loans and receivables 

Impairment on AFS financial assets 

New and increased 

Write off 

Recoveries 

Total net impairment on AFS financial assets 

9. ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES 

Administrative expenses include: 

Staff costs 

Amortisation and depreciation 

Operating lease expenses 

Auditor’s remuneration 

2014  
£m 

116.7 

16.9 

(21.2) 

112.4 

– 

– 

– 

– 

112.4 

2014  
£m 

66.5 

3.3 

3.8 

1.1 

2013 
£m

50.6

86.4

(58.7)
(58.7)
(58.7)

78.3

2.0

2.1

(2.4)

1.7

80.0

2013 
£m

56.6

3.5

3.6

1.1

Auditor remuneration includes fees for audit and non audit services payable to the Group’s and Company’s auditor, Deloitte LLP and 
are analysed as follows: 

AUDIT FEES 

Group audit of the annual accounts 

The audit of subsidiaries annual accounts 

Total audit fees 

Non audit fees in capacity as auditors 

OTHER NON AUDIT FEES 

Taxation compliance services 

Other taxation advisory services 

Corporation finance transactions 

Total other non audit fees 

Total auditor’s remuneration 

2014 
 £m 

2013 
£m

0.4 

0.3 

0.7 

0.1 

0.1 

0.2 

– 

0.3 

1.1 

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.5

1.1

118 / 119

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

10. EMPLOYEES AND DIRECTORS 

Directors’ emoluments 

Employee costs during the year including Directors: 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Pension costs 

The average number of employees (including Directors) was: 

Investment Executives 

ICG Longbow 

Infrastructure 

Directors 

2014  
£m 

3.2 

61.5 

3.3 

1.7 

66.5  

2013
 £m

1.9

53.1

2.1

1.4

56.6

2014 

2013

85 

17 

90 

3 

195 

72

12

74

3

161

The performance related element included in wages and salaries is £36.2m (2013: £32.7m). This is derived from the annual bonus 
scheme, the Omnibus Plan and the Balance Sheet Carry Scheme. 

11. TAX EXPENSE 

Analysis of tax on ordinary activities 

Current tax 

Current year 

Prior year adjustment 

Deferred taxation 

Current year 

Prior year adjustment 

Tax on profit on ordinary activities 

2014 
£m 

31.4 

(3.5) 

27.9 

(5.4) 

(1.2) 

(6.6) 

21.3 

2013
£m

30.9

(10.9)

20.0

2.6

(3.8)

(1.2)

18.8

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The average number of employees (including Directors) was: 

2014 

2013

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

10. EMPLOYEES AND DIRECTORS 

Employee costs during the year including Directors: 

Directors’ emoluments 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Pension costs 

Investment Executives 

ICG Longbow 

Infrastructure 

Directors 

scheme, the Omnibus Plan and the Balance Sheet Carry Scheme. 

11. TAX EXPENSE 

Analysis of tax on ordinary activities 

Current tax 

Current year 

Prior year adjustment 

Deferred taxation 

Current year 

Prior year adjustment 

Tax on profit on ordinary activities 

2014  

£m 

3.2 

61.5 

3.3 

1.7 

66.5  

85 

17 

90 

3 

195 

2014 

£m 

31.4 

(3.5) 

27.9 

(5.4) 

(1.2) 

(6.6) 

21.3 

2013

 £m

1.9

53.1

2.1

1.4

56.6

72

12

74

3

161

2013

£m

30.9

(10.9)

20.0

2.6

(3.8)

(1.2)

18.8

Profit on ordinary activities before tax 

Profit before tax multiplied by the rate of corporation tax in the UK of 23% (2013: 24%) 

Effects of: 

Non deductible expenditure 

Current year risk provision (credit)/charge – current tax 

Current year risk provision charge – deferred tax 

Tax losses not recognised 

Prior year adjustment to deferred tax 

Changes in statutory tax rates 

Overseas tax credit 

Prior year adjustment to current tax 

Current tax charge for the year 

2014  
£m 

158.7 

36.5 

3.5 

(11.8) 

3.2 

– 

(1.2) 

(0.5) 

(4.9) 

(3.5) 

21.3 

2013 
£m

142.6

34.2

(0.1)

0.8

–

1.8

(3.8)

(0.5)

(2.7)

(10.9)

18.8

The current year tax charge is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax of 23%. This is due to the current year reduction in tax risk 
provisions of £8.6m and the difference of £4.9m between overseas and UK tax rates. The tax charge for the prior year was lower than 
the standard rate of corporation tax of 24%. This was principally due to a prior year adjustment of £9.0m credit relating to termination 
payments made under the Medium Term Incentive Scheme.  

The performance related element included in wages and salaries is £36.2m (2013: £32.7m). This is derived from the annual bonus 

EMPLOYEE BENEFIT TRUST 

The Group has utilised an Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) to make awards to employees. The treatment of awards made through these 
structures, whilst widely used, has been disputed by HMRC. In 2011 HMRC launched the EBT Settlement Opportunity. The Group 
has participated in this opportunity and expects to agree a settlement during the current financial year.  

As part of the settlement, the Group will receive a corporate tax credit on the total amounts settled. The income tax and employees’ 
national insurance liabilities lie with the beneficiaries and this will remain the case for those beneficiaries who do not settle under the 
2011 EBT Settlement Opportunity, who may also be liable for penalties and interest. At the balance sheet date the number of 
beneficiaries who will opt to settle their liability was unknown and as a result no corporate tax asset has been recognised in the 
year ended 31 March 2014. Based on current expectations, the corporate tax credit is likely to be in the range of £nil to £24m. 

The Group will pay interest and employers’ national insurance on the amounts settled by the beneficiaries. Based on current 
expectations this liability is expected to be in the range of £nil to £14m, of which an accrual of £12m is held on the balance sheet. 

12. DIVIDENDS 

Ordinary dividends paid 

Final 

Interim  

Per share 
pence

13.7

6.6

20.3

2014 

£m 

52.8 

25.4 

78.2 

Per share  
pence 

13.0 

6.3 

19.3 

2013 

£m

50.5

24.4

74.9

The proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2014 is 14.4p per share (2013: 13.7p per share) which will amount to £57.9m 
(2013: £52.8m). Of the £78.2m (2013: £74.9m) of dividends paid, £0.1m of dividends were reinvested under the dividend reinvestment 
plan that was offered to shareholders (2013: £nil). 

120 / 121

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

13. EARNINGS PER SHARE 

Earnings 

Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per share being net profit attributable  
to equity holders of the Parent 

Number of shares 

2014  
£m 

2013 
£m

137.2 

124.4

2014 

2013

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share 

384,828,814  387,528,665

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares share options 

135,969 

46,245

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share 

384,964,783  387,574,910

Earnings per share (EPS) 

Diluted earnings per share 

14. INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Group 

Cost 

At 1 April  

Additions 

At 31 March  

Amortisation and impairment losses 

At 1 April  

Charge for the year 

At 31 March 

2014  
£m 

4.3 

– 

4.3 

– 

– 

– 

35.7p 

35.6p 

32.1p

32.1p

Goodwill

2013 
£m

Investment  
Management  
Contract  

2014 
£m

2013  
£m

2014  
£m 

4.3

–

4.3

–

–

–

5.1

–

5.1

2.8

0.9

3.7

1.4

5.1

–

5.1

1.6

1.2

2.8

2.3

9.4 

– 

9.4 

2.8 

0.9 

3.7 

5.7 

Total

2013 
£m

9.4

–

9.4

1.6

1.2

2.8

6.6

Net book value at 31 March  

4.3 

4.3

In December 2010, the Group acquired a 51% equity interest in Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP for a consideration of £4.3m. 
There were no identifiable assets or liabilities acquired, resulting in goodwill of £4.3m. This is assessed annually for impairment. Also in 
December 2010, Intermediate Capital Managers Limited, a subsidiary company, paid £5.1m to acquire an investment management 
contract from Resource Europe. The useful economic life of the intangible asset was reassessed during the year, increasing from four 
to five years. The asset will continue to be amortised on a straight line basis over the remaining two years.  

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

13. EARNINGS PER SHARE 

Earnings 

to equity holders of the Parent 

Number of shares 

Earnings per share (EPS) 

Diluted earnings per share 

14. INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Group 

Cost 

At 1 April  

Additions 

At 31 March  

Amortisation and impairment losses 

At 1 April  

Charge for the year 

At 31 March 

Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per share being net profit attributable  

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share 

384,828,814  387,528,665

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares share options 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share 

384,964,783  387,574,910

2014  

£m 

2013 

£m

137.2 

124.4

2014 

2013

135,969 

46,245

35.7p 

35.6p 

32.1p

32.1p

2014  

£m 

4.3 

– 

4.3 

– 

– 

– 

4.3

–

4.3

–

–

–

Goodwill

2013 

£m

Investment  

Management  

Contract  

2014 

£m

2013  

£m

2014  

£m 

5.1

–

5.1

2.8

0.9

3.7

1.4

5.1

–

5.1

1.6

1.2

2.8

2.3

9.4 

– 

9.4 

2.8 

0.9 

3.7 

5.7 

Total

2013 

£m

9.4

–

9.4

1.6

1.2

2.8

6.6

Net book value at 31 March  

4.3 

4.3

In December 2010, the Group acquired a 51% equity interest in Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP for a consideration of £4.3m. 

There were no identifiable assets or liabilities acquired, resulting in goodwill of £4.3m. This is assessed annually for impairment. Also in 

December 2010, Intermediate Capital Managers Limited, a subsidiary company, paid £5.1m to acquire an investment management 

contract from Resource Europe. The useful economic life of the intangible asset was reassessed during the year, increasing from four 

to five years. The asset will continue to be amortised on a straight line basis over the remaining two years.  

15. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 

Furniture and equipment 

Cost  

At 1 April  

Additions 

At 31 March  

Depreciation 

At 1 April  

Charge for the year 

At 31 March 

Net book value 

Short leasehold premises 

Cost 

At 1 April  

Additions 

At 31 March  

Depreciation 

At 1 April  

Charge for the year 

At 31 March  

Net book value 

Total net book value 

2014 
£m

12.0

2.7

14.7

9.1

2.0

11.1

3.6

5.5

–

5.5

3.8

0.4

4.2

1.3

4.9

Group 

2013  
£m 

2014  
£m 

Company

2013 
£m

11.5 

0.5 

12.0 

7.6 

1.5 

9.1 

2.9 

4.7 

0.8 

5.5 

3.0 

0.8 

3.8 

1.7 

4.6 

10.6 

2.2 

12.8 

7.8 

2.0 

9.8 

3.0 

4.2 

– 

4.2 

3.1 

0.4 

3.5 

0.7 

3.7 

10.0

0.6

10.6

5.9

1.9

7.8

2.8

4.0

0.2

4.2

2.9

0.2

3.1

1.1

3.9

122 / 123

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

16. NON CONTROLLING INTERESTS  
The Group has consolidated the following companies which have non controlling interests: 

Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP 

LREC Partners Investments No.2 Ltd 

As at 31 March  

Profit/(loss) retained for the year 

17. FINANCIAL ASSETS – NON CURRENT 

Loans and receivables held at amortised cost 

Investment in subsidiaries 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

% Non 
controlling 
interest

49

41

2014

£m

(0.1) 

–

(0.1) 

% Non 
controlling 
interest 

49 

41 

2014  
£m 

0.2 

2014  
£m 

713.6 

436.5 

52.7 

261.7 

6.0 

2014 
£m

Group

2013  
£m

1,037.2

2,010.7

–

233.4

791.7

18.5

–

350.5

294.4

40.2

2013

£m

(0.3)

–

(0.3)

2013 
£m

(0.6)

Company

2013 
£m

1,479.0

270.9

45.0

136.3

11.7

Other derivative financial instruments held at fair value 

5.8

14.7

5.8 

14.7

2,086.6

2,710.5

1,476.3 

1,957.6

2,080.8

2,695.8

1,470.5 

1,942.9

Included with financial assets designated as FVTPL is £232.0m (2013: £85.0m) relating to the Group’s 20% investment in ICG Europe 
Fund V Limited, an investment fund incorporated in Jersey. A further £25.9m (2013: £nil) relates to the Group’s investments in Via 
Location and Parkeon. During the year, these two portfolio companies underwent a restructuring which resulted in the Group acquiring 
joint control of these investments. Prior to this, the Group’s investment in these assets had been classified as loans and receivables held 
at amortised cost.  

Financial assets designated as FVTPL includes £191.0m (2013: £nil) relating to the Group’s US CLO. 

The movement in AFS financial assets during the year is set out below: 

AFS financial assets 

Balance at 1 April 

Realised gains recycled to the income statement 

Unrealised gains 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

Foreign exchange  

Balance at 31 March  

2014 
£m

350.5

(125.7)

5.5

19.7

(18.5)

3.3

19.0

(20.4)

233.4

Group

2013
£m

283.4

–

65.0

2.3

(10.9) 

–

–

10.7

350.5

2014  
£m 

45.0 

(10.5) 

11.4 

11.3 

(3.9) 

0.2 

– 

(0.8) 

52.7 

Company

2013
£m

39.8

–

4.9

0.8

(1.2)

–

–

0.7

45.0

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

16. NON CONTROLLING INTERESTS  

The Group has consolidated the following companies which have non controlling interests: 

Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP 

LREC Partners Investments No.2 Ltd 

As at 31 March  

Profit/(loss) retained for the year 

17. FINANCIAL ASSETS – NON CURRENT 

Investment in subsidiaries 

AFS financial assets held at fair value 

Financial assets designated as FVTPL 

Derivative financial instruments held at fair value – warrants 

Realised gains recycled to the income statement 

AFS financial assets 

Balance at 1 April 

Unrealised gains 

Purchases 

Realisations 

Conversion debt to equity 

Exercise of options 

Foreign exchange  

Balance at 31 March  

% Non 

controlling 

interest

49

41

2014

£m

(0.1) 

–

(0.1) 

% Non 

controlling 

interest 

49 

41 

2013

£m

(0.3)

–

(0.3)

2013 

£m

(0.6)

Company

2013 

£m

1,479.0

270.9

45.0

136.3

11.7

2013

£m

39.8

–

4.9

0.8

(1.2)

–

–

0.7

45.0

2014  

£m 

0.2 

2014  

£m 

713.6 

436.5 

52.7 

261.7 

6.0 

2014  

£m 

45.0 

(10.5) 

11.4 

11.3 

(3.9) 

0.2 

– 

(0.8) 

52.7 

2014 

£m

–

233.4

791.7

18.5

Group

2013  

£m

–

350.5

294.4

40.2

2014 

£m

350.5

(125.7)

5.5

19.7

(18.5)

3.3

19.0

(20.4)

233.4

Group

2013

£m

283.4

–

65.0

2.3

(10.9) 

–

–

10.7

350.5

18. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Other receivables 

Amount owed by Group companies 

Prepayments 

19. FINANCIAL ASSETS – CURRENT 

Loans and investments held for sale 

Other derivative financial instruments held at fair value 

2014
 £m

52.8

–

20.5

73.3

2014 
£m

115.8

12.8

128.6

Group 

2013 
£m 

29.7 

– 

24.2 

53.9 

Group 

2013 
£m 

30.4 

40.2 

70.6 

Loans and receivables held at amortised cost 

1,037.2

2,010.7

20. CALLED UP SHARE CAPITAL AND OWN SHARES RESERVE 

Group and Company 

Allotted, called up and fully paid  

402,242,770 (2013: 402,056,200) ordinary shares of 20p 

2014  
£m 

21.7 

439.0 

8.8 

469.5 

2014 
 £m 

115.8 

12.8 

128.6 

Company

2013
£m

10.0

432.3

11.3

453.6

Company

2013
£m

30.4

40.2

70.6

2014  
£m 

2013
£m

80.4 

80.4

Other derivative financial instruments held at fair value 

5.8

14.7

5.8 

14.7

2,080.8

2,695.8

1,470.5 

1,942.9

2,086.6

2,710.5

1,476.3 

1,957.6

Included with financial assets designated as FVTPL is £232.0m (2013: £85.0m) relating to the Group’s 20% investment in ICG Europe 

Fund V Limited, an investment fund incorporated in Jersey. A further £25.9m (2013: £nil) relates to the Group’s investments in Via 

Location and Parkeon. During the year, these two portfolio companies underwent a restructuring which resulted in the Group acquiring 

joint control of these investments. Prior to this, the Group’s investment in these assets had been classified as loans and receivables held 

at amortised cost.  

Financial assets designated as FVTPL includes £191.0m (2013: £nil) relating to the Group’s US CLO. 

The movement in AFS financial assets during the year is set out below: 

The own shares reserve represents the cost of shares in ICG plc purchased in the market and held by the EBT, to hedge future liabilities 
arising under long term incentive plans. The movement in the year is as follows:  

At 1 April  

Purchased 

Options/awards exercised 

As at 31 March  

2014
£m

45.7

35.4

(18.7)

62.4

2013 
£m 

2014  
Number 

2013
Number

33.0  15,689,104 

11,935,406

13.3 

7,831,555 

3,984,457

(0.6) 

(6,065,317) 

(230,759)

45.7  17,455,342 

15,689,104

The number of shares held by the EBT at the balance sheet date represented 4.3% (2013: 3.9%) of the parent company’s allotted, 
called up and fully paid share capital. 

Company

21. PROVISIONS 

Group and Company 

At 1 April 2013 

Utilisation of provision 

Unwinding of discount 

As at 31 March 2014 

Onerous
 lease
 £m

4.0

(0.6)

0.2

3.6

124 / 125

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

21. PROVISIONS CONTINUED 
The provisions are expected to mature in the following time periods: 

Group and Company 

Less than one year 

One to five years 

Greater than five years 

Total greater than one year 

As at 31 March  

2014 
£m 

0.4 

2.3 

0.9 

3.2 

3.6 

2013
£m

0.4

2.3

1.3

3.6

4.0

The Group holds onerous lease provisions of £3.6m (2013: £4.0m) against certain leaseholds in connection with surplus space. 
The provision for these onerous lease contracts has been made taking into account residual lease commitments, other outgoings 
and sub-letting arrangements. It is envisaged that the provisions will be utilised on an even basis until 2021. 

22. FINANCIAL LIABILITIES 

Group 

Liabilities held at amortised cost: 

– Private placements 

– Listed notes and bonds 

– Unsecured bank debt 

– Secured bank debt 

– Floating rate secured notes 

Liabilities held at FVTPL: 

– US CLO loan notes 

Bank overdraft 

2014

2013

Current
£m

Non current
£m

Current 
£m 

Non current
£m

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

283.9

153.5

19.8

9.3

120.3

189.6

–

776.4

142.9 

– 

318.8 

– 

– 

– 

10.7 

472.4 

198.3

113.5

104.4

–

272.7

–

–

688.9

The floating rate notes are secured on the debt portfolio of a subsidiary company, Intermediate Finance II plc.  

The US CLO loan notes were issued by the Group’s US CLO which closed on 4 March 2014. The Group acquired the entire equity of 
the CLO and has been assessed to control the vehicle requiring it to be consolidated in these Group financial statements. The assets of 
the US CLO are shown with financial assets (see note 17). The net exposure on the Company balance sheet is $40.9m (£24.5m) 
representing the investment made by the Company into the CLO. 

Company 

Liabilities held at amortised cost: 

– Private placements 

– Listed notes and bonds 

– Unsecured bank debt 

Bank overdraft 

2014

2013

Current
£m

Non current
£m

Current 
£m 

Non current
£m

–

–

–

–

–

283.9

153.5

19.8

–

457.2

142.9 

– 

318.8 

10.7 

472.4 

198.3

113.5

104.4

–

416.2

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Group holds onerous lease provisions of £3.6m (2013: £4.0m) against certain leaseholds in connection with surplus space. 

The provision for these onerous lease contracts has been made taking into account residual lease commitments, other outgoings 

and sub-letting arrangements. It is envisaged that the provisions will be utilised on an even basis until 2021. 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

21. PROVISIONS CONTINUED 

The provisions are expected to mature in the following time periods: 

Group and Company 

Less than one year 

One to five years 

Greater than five years 

Total greater than one year 

As at 31 March  

22. FINANCIAL LIABILITIES 

Group 

Liabilities held at amortised cost: 

– Private placements 

– Listed notes and bonds 

– Unsecured bank debt 

– Secured bank debt 

– Floating rate secured notes 

Liabilities held at FVTPL: 

– US CLO loan notes 

Bank overdraft 

Company 

Liabilities held at amortised cost: 

– Private placements 

– Listed notes and bonds 

– Unsecured bank debt 

Bank overdraft 

Current

Non current

£m

Current 

£m 

Non current

£m

2014 

£m 

0.4 

2.3 

0.9 

3.2 

3.6 

142.9 

318.8 

– 

– 

– 

– 

10.7 

472.4 

2013

£m

0.4

2.3

1.3

3.6

4.0

2013

198.3

113.5

104.4

272.7

–

–

–

688.9

142.9 

– 

318.8 

10.7 

472.4 

198.3

113.5

104.4

–

416.2

2014

£m

283.9

153.5

19.8

9.3

120.3

189.6

–

776.4

2014

£m

283.9

153.5

19.8

–

457.2

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

23. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Amounts owed to Group companies 

Social security tax 

Included within accruals are £34.9m (2013: £nil) relating to the Group’s US CLO. 

2014 
£m

3.6

117.8

–

1.1

122.5

Group 

2013 
£m 

1.9 

75.7 

– 

1.4 

79.0 

2014  
£m 

1.8 

70.5 

259.0 

1.0 

332.3 

Company

2013
£m

0.9

59.5

255.9

1.4

317.7

24. DEFERRED TAX 

Group 

At 31 March 2012 

Prior year adjustment 

Charge to equity 

(Credit)/charge to income 

At 31 March 2013 

Prior year adjustment 

Reclassification from current tax 

Credit to equity 

(Credit)/charge to income 

At 31 March 2014 

The floating rate notes are secured on the debt portfolio of a subsidiary company, Intermediate Finance II plc.  

The US CLO loan notes were issued by the Group’s US CLO which closed on 4 March 2014. The Group acquired the entire equity of 

the CLO and has been assessed to control the vehicle requiring it to be consolidated in these Group financial statements. The assets of 

the US CLO are shown with financial assets (see note 17). The net exposure on the Company balance sheet is $40.9m (£24.5m) 

representing the investment made by the Company into the CLO. 

Current

Non current

£m

Current 

£m 

Non current

£m

Company 

At 31 March 2012 

Prior year adjustment 

Charge to equity 

2013

(Credit)/charge to income 

At 31 March 2013 

Prior year adjustment 

Credit to equity 

(Credit)/charge to income 

At 31 March 2014 

Other 
derivatives 
£m

Warrants and 
investments 
£m

Remuneration 
deductible  
as paid 
 £m 

Other 
temporary 
differences 
 £m 

17.2

(1.8)

–

(1.7)

13.7

0.1

–

–

(4.0)

9.8

31.3

2.1

11.0

8.8

53.2

0.4

–

(30.8)

(1.7)

21.1

(5.1) 

(3.9) 

– 

(4.5) 

(13.5) 

(1.4) 

– 

– 

(3.8) 

(18.7) 

(0.1) 

(0.2) 

– 

– 

(0.3) 

(0.3) 

6.1 

– 

4.1 

9.6 

Other 
derivatives
 £m

Warrants and 
investments 
£m

Remuneration 
deductible  
as paid 
 £m 

Other 
temporary 
differences  
£m 

17.2

(1.8)

–

(1.7)

13.7

0.1

–

(4.0)

9.8

1.3

–

1.1

0.7

3.1

–

(0.1)

(2.0)

1.0

(4.0) 

(1.2) 

– 

(2.5) 

(7.7) 

(0.2) 

– 

(2.3) 

(10.2) 

– 

(0.8) 

– 

– 

(0.8) 

0.1 

– 

3.3 

2.6 

Total
 £m

43.3

(3.8)

11.0

2.6

53.1

(1.2)

6.1

(30.8)

(5.4)

21.8

Total 
£m

14.5

(3.8)

1.1

(3.5)

8.3

–

(0.1)

(5.0)

3.2

Deferred tax has been accounted for at the substantively enacted corporation tax rate of 21% (2013: 23%). Further reductions to the 
main rate have been proposed to reduce the rate to 20% from 1 April 2015. These further reductions in the tax rate had not been 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and therefore are not reflected in these financial statements. 

As at 31 March 2014 the Group has tax losses carried forward of £12.6m (2013: £18.6m). It is not probable that these will be utilised 
and therefore no deferred tax asset has been recognised.  

126 / 127

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

25. SHARE BASED PAYMENTS 
All share based payment transactions are equity settled. The total charge to the income statement for the year was £12.2m 
(2013: £13.6m) and this was credited to the share based payments reserve in equity. 

INTERMEDIATE CAPITAL GROUP PLC 2001 APPROVED AND UNAPPROVED EXECUTIVE SHARE OPTION SCHEME  

All options under the Intermediate Capital Group plc 2001 scheme have vested, no new options will be awarded as the scheme is now 
closed. Analysis of movements in the number and weighted average exercise price of options is set out below: 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Forfeited 

Exercised 

Outstanding at 31 March 

Of which are currently exercisable 

2014

Number

2013

2,606,539

5,353,766

(418,496)

(1,104,558) 

(184,098)

(1,642,669) 

2,003,945

2,606,539

360,389

427,198

Weighted average 
exercise price (£)

2014 

4.51 

5.10 

4.59 

4.44 

2.74 

2013

3.59

3.31

3.48

4.51

2.73

The weighted average remaining contractual life is 2.00 years (2013: 2.96 years). 

Exercise price 

£2.230 

£2.947 

£6.008 

£4.844 

£5.048 

£4.286 

£4.101 

£4.731 

£4.729 

£3.322 

2014 Number 

2013 Number

246,317 

284,876

25,601 

181,439 

591,122 

136,762 

447,291 

88,471 

25,601

314,604

790,073

136,762

592,830

88,471

263,691 

321,821

23,251 

– 

23,251

28,250

2,003,945 

2,606,539

INTERMEDIATE CAPITAL GROUP PLC OMNIBUS PLAN 

Details of all the different types of awards under the Omnibus Plan are provided in the Directors’ remuneration report  
on pages 62 to 80. 

Share awards outstanding under the Omnibus Plan were as follows: 

Deferred Share Awards 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Granted 

Vested 

Forfeited 

Outstanding at 31 March 

2014

863,224

338,300

Number

2013

843,382

434,342

(464,245)

(329,550) 

(1,000)

(84,950) 

736,279

863,224

Weighted average
 fair value (£)

2014 

2.74 

4.56 

2.76 

3.34 

3.56 

2013

3.02

2.33

2.96

2.58

2.74

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

Exercise price 

£2.230 

£2.947 

£6.008 

£4.844 

£5.048 

£4.286 

£4.101 

£4.731 

£4.729 

£3.322 

Deferred Share Awards 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Granted 

Vested 

Forfeited 

Outstanding at 31 March 

25. SHARE BASED PAYMENTS 

All share based payment transactions are equity settled. The total charge to the income statement for the year was £12.2m 

(2013: £13.6m) and this was credited to the share based payments reserve in equity. 

INTERMEDIATE CAPITAL GROUP PLC 2001 APPROVED AND UNAPPROVED EXECUTIVE SHARE OPTION SCHEME  

All options under the Intermediate Capital Group plc 2001 scheme have vested, no new options will be awarded as the scheme is now 

closed. Analysis of movements in the number and weighted average exercise price of options is set out below: 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Forfeited 

Exercised 

Outstanding at 31 March 

Of which are currently exercisable 

The weighted average remaining contractual life is 2.00 years (2013: 2.96 years). 

2014

Number

2013

2,606,539

5,353,766

(418,496)

(1,104,558) 

(184,098)

(1,642,669) 

2,003,945

2,606,539

360,389

427,198

Weighted average 

exercise price (£)

2014 

4.51 

5.10 

4.59 

4.44 

2.74 

2013

3.59

3.31

3.48

4.51

2.73

PLC Equity Awards 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Granted 

Vested 

Outstanding at 31 March 

FMC Equity Awards 

Outstanding at 1 April 

Granted 

Vesting 

Forfeited 

Outstanding at 31 March 

2014

Number 

2013

6,870,338

4,937,534 

544,754

1,932,804 

(951,375)

– 

6,463,717

6,870,338 

Weighted average
 fair value (£)

2014 

2.74 

4.56 

2.58 

2.92 

2013

2.90

2.33

–

2.74

2014

126,171

18,492

(36,604)

(9,722)

98,337

Number 

2013

81,603 

44,568 

– 

– 

126,171 

Weighted average 
fair value (£)

2014 

227.00 

310.00 

 190.00 

220.00 

279.00 

2013

217.00

245.00

–

–

227.00

2014 Number 

2013 Number

246,317 

284,876

25,601 

181,439 

591,122 

136,762 

447,291 

88,471 

25,601

314,604

790,073

136,762

592,830

88,471

263,691 

321,821

23,251 

– 

23,251

28,250

2,003,945 

2,606,539

The fair values of awards granted under the ICG plc Omnibus Plan are determined by the average share price for the five business days 
prior to grant, except for the FMC equity awards which are determined by an independent third party valuation. 

26. FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS 
At the balance sheet date, the Company had outstanding commitments which can be called on over the next five years, as follows: 

ICG Senior Debt Partners 

ICG Europe Fund V 

ICG-Longbow UK Real Estate Debt Investments III 

ICG US CLO 2014-2 

Intermediate Capital Asia Pacific Fund II 2008 

2014 
£m 

21.6 

205.1 

29.6 

21.0 

– 

277.3 

2013
£m

35.6

402.3

37.8

–

49.0

524.7

INTERMEDIATE CAPITAL GROUP PLC OMNIBUS PLAN 

Details of all the different types of awards under the Omnibus Plan are provided in the Directors’ remuneration report  

on pages 62 to 80. 

Share awards outstanding under the Omnibus Plan were as follows: 

27. OPERATING LEASES 
At the balance sheet date, the Group and Parent Company had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under 
non cancellable operating leases, falling due as follows: 

2014

863,224

338,300

Number

2013

843,382

434,342

(464,245)

(329,550) 

(1,000)

(84,950) 

736,279

863,224

Weighted average

 fair value (£)

2014 

2.74 

4.56 

2.76 

3.34 

3.56 

2013

3.02

2.33

2.96

2.58

2.74

Within one year 

Two to five years 

After five years 

2014
£m

4.0

13.3

5.1

Group 

2013 
£m 

3.8 

13.3 

7.9 

2014 
£m 

2.2 

8.9 

4.4 

Company

2013
£m

2.2

8.9

6.1

128 / 129

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 
continued 

28. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 
All transactions between the parent company and its subsidiary undertakings are classified as related party transactions. All significant 
Company balances with subsidiary undertakings are disclosed in notes 16, 18 and 23.  

Aggregated significant transactions with subsidiary undertakings related to dividends received of £119.3m (2013: £77.5m). 

Management consider key management personnel to be the Executive Committee who are also members of the Board of Directors, 
and all related party transactions are disclosed in the Directors’ remuneration report. 

29. PRINCIPAL GROUP COMPANIES 
The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Group are shown below. All are wholly owned, except where stated. 

Name 

Country of incorporation  

Principal activity 

Intermediate Capital Investments Limited 

England and Wales 

Investment company 

Intermediate Capital Managers Limited* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Finance II PLC 

JOG Partners Limited** 

Intermediate Investments LLP 

Intermediate Investments Jersey Limited 

Intermediate Capital Asia Pacific Limited* 

Intermediate Capital Group SAS* 

Intermediate Capital Group Espana SL* 

Intermediate Capital Nordic AB* 

England and Wales 

Provider of mezzanine 

England and Wales 

Investment company 

England and Wales 

Holding company for loans and investments 

Jersey 

Hong Kong 

France 

Spain 

Sweden 

Investment company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Capital Group Beratungsgesellschaft GmbH*  Germany 

Intermediate Capital Group Benelux B.V.* 

Intermediate Capital Australia Pty Limited* 

Netherlands 

Australia 

Intermediate Capital Group Inc* 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Capital Group (Singapore) Pte. Limited* 

Singapore 

Advisory company 

ICG FMC Limited 

England and Wales 

Holding company for funds management 

Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP (51% owned)* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

ICG Global Investment Jersey Limited*  
(previously ICG EFV Jersey Limited) 

ICG Europe Fund V Jersey Limited (20% owned) 

Jersey 

Jersey 

General Partner 

Investment company 

ICG Fund Advisors LLC* 

ICG Debt Advisors LLC* 

Nomura ICG KK (50% owned) 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

Japan 

Advisory company 

ICG Alternative Investment Limited* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

ICG US CLO 2014-1, Limited 

Unites States of America 

Investment company 

All companies listed above have a reporting date of 31 March, with the exception of the entities incorporated in the United States of 
America which have a 31 December reporting date. 

* Indirect subsidiary of ICG plc 
** JOG Partners Limited is a member of Intermediate Investments LLP 

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2014 

continued 

28. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 

All transactions between the parent company and its subsidiary undertakings are classified as related party transactions. All significant 

Company balances with subsidiary undertakings are disclosed in notes 16, 18 and 23.  

Aggregated significant transactions with subsidiary undertakings related to dividends received of £119.3m (2013: £77.5m). 

Management consider key management personnel to be the Executive Committee who are also members of the Board of Directors, 

and all related party transactions are disclosed in the Directors’ remuneration report. 

29. PRINCIPAL GROUP COMPANIES 

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Group are shown below. All are wholly owned, except where stated. 

Name 

Country of incorporation  

Principal activity 

Intermediate Capital Investments Limited 

England and Wales 

Investment company 

Intermediate Capital Managers Limited* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Finance II PLC 

JOG Partners Limited** 

Intermediate Investments LLP 

Intermediate Investments Jersey Limited 

Intermediate Capital Asia Pacific Limited* 

Intermediate Capital Group SAS* 

Intermediate Capital Group Espana SL* 

Intermediate Capital Nordic AB* 

Intermediate Capital Group Benelux B.V.* 

Intermediate Capital Australia Pty Limited* 

England and Wales 

Provider of mezzanine 

England and Wales 

Investment company 

England and Wales 

Holding company for loans and investments 

Jersey 

Hong Kong 

France 

Spain 

Sweden 

Netherlands 

Australia 

Investment company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Capital Group Beratungsgesellschaft GmbH*  Germany 

Intermediate Capital Group Inc* 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

Intermediate Capital Group (Singapore) Pte. Limited* 

Singapore 

Advisory company 

ICG FMC Limited 

England and Wales 

Holding company for funds management 

Longbow Real Estate Capital LLP (51% owned)* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

ICG Global Investment Jersey Limited*  

(previously ICG EFV Jersey Limited) 

ICG Europe Fund V Jersey Limited (20% owned) 

Jersey 

Jersey 

General Partner 

Investment company 

ICG Fund Advisors LLC* 

ICG Debt Advisors LLC* 

Nomura ICG KK (50% owned) 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

United States of America 

Advisory company 

Japan 

Advisory company 

ICG Alternative Investment Limited* 

England and Wales 

Advisory company 

ICG US CLO 2014-1, Limited 

Unites States of America 

Investment company 

All companies listed above have a reporting date of 31 March, with the exception of the entities incorporated in the United States of 

America which have a 31 December reporting date. 

* Indirect subsidiary of ICG plc 

** JOG Partners Limited is a member of Intermediate Investments LLP 

30. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The Company and its subsidiaries may be party to legal claims arising in the course of business. The Directors do not anticipate that  
the outcome of any such potential proceedings and claims will have a material, adverse effect on the Group’s financial position and at 
present there are no such claims where their financial impact can be reasonably estimated. The Company and its subsidiaries may be 
able to recover any monies paid out in settlement of claims from third parties. 

31. POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 
There have been no material events since the balance sheet date. 

130 / 131

Financial statementsGovernancestrateGic report 
 
 
 
glossary

glossary

Term

AIFMD

Assets under management 

Carried Interest

Cash core income 

Catch up fees

Closed end fund

Co-investment

shorT form

DefiniTion

AUM

Carry

CCI

The EU Alternative Investment Fund Managers Directive

Value of all funds and assets managed by the FMC

Share of profits that the fund manager is due once it has returned the cost of investment 
and agreed preferred return to investors

Profit before tax excluding fair value movement on derivatives, capital gains, impairments 
and unrealised rolled up interest

Fees not previously recognised as either the fund commitment had not been 
contractually agreed or the income was otherwise uncertain

A fund where the amount of investable capital is fixed

Co-invest

A direct investment made alongside a fund taking a pro rata share of all instruments

Collateralised Debt Obligation

CDO

Investment grade security backed by pool of non mortgage based bonds, loans and 
other assets

Collateralised Loan Obligation

CLO

CLO is a type of CDO, which is backed by a portfolio of loans

Close

EBITDA

Employee Benefit Trust

Financial Conduct Authority

Financial Reporting Council

Financial Services Authority

Fund Management Company 

HMRC

IAS

IFRS

Illiquid assets

Investment Company 

Internal Rate of Return

Key man

Liquid assets

EBT

FCA

FRC

FSA

FMC

IC

IRR

A stage in fundraising whereby a fund is able to release or draw down the capital 
contractually committed at that date

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation

Special purpose vehicle used to purchase ICG plc shares which are used to satisfy share 
options and awards granted under the Group’s employee share schemes.

Successor to the FSA which regulates conduct by both retail and wholesale financial 
service firms in provision of services to consumers

UK’s independent regulator responsible for promoting high quality corporate governance 
and reporting

Predecessor of the FCA

The Group’s operating vehicle, which sources and manages investments on behalf of the 
IC and third party funds

HM Revenue & Customs, the UK tax authority

International Accounting Standards

International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union

Asset classes which are not actively traded

The investment unit of ICG plc. It co-invests alongside third party funds

The annualised return received by an investor in a fund. It is calculated from cash drawn 
from and returned to the investor together with the residual value of the asset

Certain funds have designated key men. The departure of a key man without adequate 
replacement triggers a contractual right for investors to cancel their commitments

Asset classes with an active, established market in which assets may be readily bought 
and sold

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014shorT form

DefiniTion

A fund which remains open to new commitments and where an investors commitment 
may be redeemed with appropriate notice

Total fee income less operating expenses divided by total fee income

PIK

Also known as rolled up interest. PIK is the interest accruing on a loan until maturity or 
refinancing, without any cash flows until that time

Incentive fees paid when fund performance exceeds a fixed return

The return of invested capital in the form of principal, rolled up interest and/or capital gain

ROE

Profit after tax divided by average shareholders’ funds for the period

A form of financial structuring whereby a pool of assets is used as security (collateral) for 
the issue of financial instruments

glossary

Term

Open ended fund

Operating margin

Payment in kind

Performance fees

Realisation

Return on equity 

Securitisation

Seed capital

Senior debt

Turnbull Committee guidance

UK Corporate Governance Code

The Code

UNPRI

Whole loans

Capital invested to establish a fund strategy

Senior debt ranks above mezzanine and equity

Guidance published by the FRC setting out best practice on internal control for UK 
listed companies

Sets out standards of good practice in relation to board leadership and effectiveness, 
remuneration, accountability and relations with shareholders

UN Principles for Responsible Investing

A property loan which represents all debt secured on the property

132 / 133

notes

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014134 / 135

shareholder and  
company information

TimeTable

evenT

Ex dividend date

Record date for financial year 2013 final dividend 

AGM

Payment of final dividend 

company informaTion

DaTe

sTockbrokers

11 June 2014

13 June 2014

23 July 2014

28 July 2014

JPMorgan Cazenove
25 Bank Street
Canary Wharf
London
E14 5JP

Half year results announcement for the  
six months to 30 September 2014

21 November 2014

WebsiTe

The Company’s website address is 
www.icgplc.com

Copies of the Annual and Interim Reports  
and other information about the Company  
are available on this site.

Jefferies Hoare Govett Limited
Vintners Place
68 Upper Thames Street
London 
EC4V 3BJ

bankers

Lloyds TSB plc 
25 Gresham Street 
London 
EC2V 7HN

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc 
135 Bishopsgate 
London
EC2M 3UR

auDiTor

Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and  
Statutory Auditor
2 New Street Square
London
EC4A 3BZ

regisTrars 

Computershare Investor Services PLC 
PO Box 92 
The Pavilions 
Bridgwater Road 
Bristol 
BS99 7NH

regisTereD office 

Juxon House
100 St Paul’s Churchyard
London 
EC4M 8BU

company regisTraTion number 

02234775

ICG ANNUAL REPORT ANd ACCOUNTS 2014Designed and produced  
by Radley Yeldar  

www.ry.com

 
I

n

t

e

r

m

e

d

I

a

t

e

C

a

p

I

t

a

l

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

C

A

n

n

u

A

l

R

e

p

o

R

t

A

n

d

A

C

C

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

4

www.icgplc.com
Authorised and regulated by the 
Financial Conduct Authority